JP6637866B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs an effect of suggesting a degree of expectation of a jackpot, on condition that operation of operation means such as operation buttons is performed at a predetermined timing. For example, in Patent Literature 1, when there is an operation for prompting a player to perform a button operation and an operation input is performed via an operation button, a game state such as a future big hit occurrence or a bonus character effect is generated. An effect that suggests a change is performed.

JP 2014-188056 A

  However, if the mere operation of the operation buttons as described above is a trigger for executing an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation or a change in the game state, the effect may be poor, and in order to improve the interest of the game, Further improvement was required.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in view of the above background.

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game determining unit that determines whether to execute a special game advantageous to a player when a starting condition is satisfied, and a normal game state. And a game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state different from the normal game state, a first operation means operable by a player, and a first operation means operable by the player, and A different second operation means, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means, and an effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means; and a control of the variable display based on the result of the determination And a movable unit movable from a first position to a second position, wherein the effect control unit executes a specific effect after the start of the variable display based on the result of the determination. Possible and said executable The output includes a first specific effect, a second specific effect to be performed after execution of the first specific effect, a, while performing the second specific effect is to execute the first specific effect It is easier to perform an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation unit than during the operation, and the movable unit is configured to control the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation unit by the effect control unit. In comparison with the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled, it is easier to move from the first position to the second position after the start of the variable display and before the execution of the operation effect. Features.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can improve the interest of a game can be provided.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a partial perspective view of a game machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol. (A) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for a big hit winning, (b) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for a small hit winning, and (c) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determining table for a loss. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a first big hit game big win opening / closing control table, (c) is a second big hit game big win port opening / closing control table (D) is a diagram illustrating a third jackpot game large winning opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing a small hitting game control table, and (b) is a diagram showing a small hitting game big winning opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data decision table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition decision table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 1st to 30th variation in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table at the 31st to 74th variation in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table at the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. (A) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. FIG. 7E is a diagram illustrating an auxiliary game control table, and FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a second start-up opening and closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration of a special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage section of the special symbol holding storage area, (c) is a diagram of a normal symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c. FIG. 3D is a diagram illustrating a configuration, and FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating a configuration of each storage unit of a normal symbol holding storage area. 6 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the small hitting game processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit game end processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows up to the middle of the command analysis processing in the effect control board. 34 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the command analysis processing in FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows the variable effect pattern determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect type determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows the production mode setting processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing in the effect control board. It is a figure showing an effect mode decision table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination table matched with the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination table matched with the effect mode B. It is a figure showing the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C. It is a figure showing the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every type of each special effect which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode D. It is a figure showing the specific effect judgment table for the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state. It is a figure showing the specific effect judgment table for the high probability game state and the time reduction game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for losing. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for losing. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for losing. It is a figure which shows the special effect image output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure showing the degree of big hit expectation of a specific production. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. (A) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the normal effect button, (b) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the effect button at the time of the specific effect, and (c). FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state in which image output and audio output are performed at the time of a specific effect. It is a figure showing the example of the display result stopped and displayed as a result of change display. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device, (b) is a 1st game information display device and a 2nd. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of the information displayed on a game information display device and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the first half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the latter half of the example 5 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display device, a 2nd game information display device, and a 1st image display device. It is a front view of the first game information display device. It is a rear view of the first game information display device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the first game information display device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a state in which the first game information display device is disassembled. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first game information display device. FIG. 3 is a front view of a first display substrate. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first display substrate. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is the schematic which shows the control structure which concerns on the 1st game information display device. It is a front view around the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a covering member and an identification means. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a front view of the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a rear view of the first game information display device according to the modification. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a first game information display device according to a modification. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of a state where a first game information display device according to a modification is disassembled. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram showing the control composition concerning the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram showing the control composition concerning the 1st game information display concerning a modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the 2nd game information display. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation | variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation | variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation | variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th example of a change pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th specific example and the timing chart of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means concerning a fluctuation pattern. It is an animation figure showing that a plurality of operation means can be operated. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example regarding a state transition, and is a figure which shows the 6th specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means regarding a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example regarding a state transition, and is a figure which shows the 7th specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means regarding a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example regarding a state transition, and is a figure which shows the 8th specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation | variation pattern and the operation means regarding a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example regarding a state transition, and is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern and the 9th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure showing the 5th example about a state transition. It is a figure showing the 6th example concerning a state transition. It is a figure showing the 7th example about a state transition. It is a figure showing the 8th example concerning a state transition.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “the present embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y has a game board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame Y1, and a game area 2A in which game balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facilities of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported about the hinge mechanism H. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front area of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visibly covers the game area 2A with the game board 2 closed.

  At the other end of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 for storing a plurality of game balls, and a launch operation device 3 which can be operated to fire the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launching device (not shown) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launching device is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the saucer 50 are supplied to the game ball launching device.

  The firing operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball firing device fires a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball firing intensity”).

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are disposed immediately below a special winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into a substantially central portion of the game board 2. The image display device 14 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. In addition, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired at a predetermined game ball firing intensity rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. Note that a plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of general winning ports 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. Further, a second winning gate 10 through which game balls can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The prize gates 9, 10 are provided with prize gate detection sensors 9a, 10a for detecting game balls. Normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect game balls. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting port 6 which is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first starting port 6 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. The first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first starting port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first opening detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Immediately below the first starting port 6, a variable second starting port 7 is provided. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 into one of a basic mode (closed mode) or a special mode (open mode) in which winning is not possible. The second starting port 7 is also provided with a second starting port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The second starting port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The ordinary movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and usually stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ordinary movable piece 70A pivots forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled to a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the normal movable piece 70A opens the second starting port 7, it is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second starting port control device 70 is that it is determined to be a winning ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol lottery described above.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable big winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which winning is possible. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The special winning opening control device 80 includes a special movable piece 80A that can be rotated and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit that rotates the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and usually stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A and closes the special winning opening 8. are doing. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A forms a basic aspect of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special movable piece 80A opens the special winning opening 8, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and be guided to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). ) Is determined to be a special jackpot symbol or a special jackpot symbol.

  On the surface of the game board 2, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, a normal symbol first display 62, a first special symbol holding first display 63, a second special symbol A symbol holding first display 64 and a normal symbol holding first display 65 are provided. The display device provided with these is referred to as a first game information display device 59. Also, on the surface of the game board 2, a first special symbol holding second display 83, a second special symbol holding second display 84, a normal symbol holding second display 85, a right-handed second display 87, a A first special symbol second display 88, a second special symbol second display 89, and a normal symbol second display 90 are provided. A display device provided with these is referred to as a second game information display device 79.

  The first special symbol first display 60 is a variable display device that displays a result of a first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 6, and a second special symbol first display. The device 61 is a variable display device that displays a result of a second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  The first special symbol lottery means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a random number for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired random number for jackpot determination is a random number corresponding to “big hit”. It is to determine whether or not. The second special symbol lottery means that when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, a random number for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired random number for jackpot determination is a random number corresponding to “big hit”. It is to determine whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol first display 60 displays a special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery. A stop display of the symbol is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 indicates the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol first display 61.

  For example, the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED representing the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol first display 62 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10. Ordinary symbol lottery means that when a game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, a random number for hit determination is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for hit determination is a random value corresponding to "hit". Processing.

  When the ordinary symbol lottery is performed, the ordinary symbol first display unit 62 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the lottery result, and stops the ordinary symbol representing the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In other words, the stop display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol first display 62 is an announcement of the lottery result.

  For example, the symbol first display 62 usually includes a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol first display 62 flashes at a predetermined interval. Then, in the normal symbol stop display, a specific LED representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is lit.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the start-up openings 6 and 7 during the special symbol variation display or the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 operates, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and the special symbol is displayed. The result of the symbol lottery is not always notified. That is, the change display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be changed and displayed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit is set to “4” for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. In other words, up to four rights to execute the special symbol change display can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold first display 63 displays the number of changes (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). Is displayed. The second special symbol holding first display 64 displays the number of changes (hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure holding number”) of variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure changing display”). Is displayed. The first special symbol reservation first display 63 and the second special symbol reservation first display 64 each include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and light a predetermined LED according to the number of each reservation.

  In addition, similarly, the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “general display variable display”) also has the upper limit reserved number set to four, and the retained number (G: hereinafter, referred to as the “general reserved number”) ) Is usually displayed on the symbol holding first display 65. The normal symbol holding first display 65 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of ordinary symbols held.

  Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect devices are the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect agent device 1701, the second effect agent device 1702, and the third effect device. It is composed of the accessory device 1703. An image display device 14, a first production accessory device 1701, a second production accessory device 1702, and a third production accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the production lighting device are provided. 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs an effect using images by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but a display device of another type such as a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used.

  The first production accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. In addition, the second production accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. The third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each production accessory device operates a decoration member as a movable member provided for each, and performs the production by the operation. The sound output device 15 performs sound effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” (the original position) above the image display device 14 to the “operation position 1-1” (the central position on the front surface of the image display device 14). To the position after the movement). Further, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-2”, which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via the “operating position 1-1”. I do. The first decorative member 17A performs a moving operation such as returning from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” after moving from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1”, or performing a movement operation from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, the moving operation returns to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decoration member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second production accessory device 1702 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Accordingly, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (the original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower portion of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and the image display device The position moves to the “operation position 2” (position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of No. 14. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands rightward with the lower part of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and moves to the “standby position 2” (original position). A moving operation such as returning is performed.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like provided in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Thus, the third decorative member 17C falls rightward from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the lower left position of the image display device 14, with the lower part of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum, and displays the image. It moves to “operation position 3” (the position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands up to the left with the fulcrum below the third decorative member 17Cc and moves to the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
In addition, any of the first decorative member 17A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C are not limited to the shapes and operation modes described here.

  In addition, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described below.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A as an operable "first operation means", and an effect button operation detection switch 18a for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 18A.

The effect button 18A has a non-projecting state in which the effect button 18A is in a normal operation position (FIG. 2A), and a projecting state in which the effect button 18A projects to an operation position higher than the non-projecting state (FIG. 2B). The state when the pressing operation is detected can be changed to a state (FIG. 2C) in which the pressing operation is retracted below the non-projecting state.
In the non-projecting state, the effect button 18 </ b> A is in a state in which only the tip portion slightly projects upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
In the protruding state, the effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) higher than the non-protruding state from the surface around the tray 50.
Further, the effect button 18A slightly retreats downward from the surface around the saucer 50, and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 18 has a structure that can change the effect button 18A between a non-projecting state, a projecting state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the effect button 18A in the non-protruding state or the protruding state is pressed to the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and when the pressing operation is released thereafter, the state returns from the pressed state to the non-protruding state.

  The direction in which the effect button 18A moves between the non-projecting position, the projecting position, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is defined as the direction of the effect button 18A.

  When the effect button 18A detects a pressing operation, the effect button operation detecting switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A is completely pressed to the lamp control board 104. I do.

  Further, when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state, the protruding state detection switch 18a21 outputs a protruding state detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A is held at the position where the effect button 18A protrudes to the maximum (the position of the protruding state). Output to

  The effect button 18A has a transparent member capable of transmitting light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When the LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. However, the effect button 18A can vibrate (reciprocate) in a vertical direction (forward / backward direction) from a non-projecting state. There are two stages. It is difficult for a player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 18A is vibrating, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 18A. When the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating at a low speed, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "POKO ... POCO ...", and when the effect button 18A vibrates at a high speed, the player When the user touches the effect button 18A, the vibration "pocopocopocopoco" is transmitted to the player.

  Further, at the left end of the glass door Y2, an effect lever device 19 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described below is provided.

  The effect lever device 19 includes an effect lever 19A as an operable “second operation means”, and an operation detection switch 19a that detects an operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operation rod that can be gripped by a player, and is attached so as to be tiltable in the up and down direction. The operation detection switch 19a detects a downward tilt operation of the effect lever 19A.

  In the present embodiment, a state in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the "first operation means" or the effect lever 19A as the "second operation means" is valid is referred to as an "operation valid state". The sub CPU 102a performs control such that a predetermined effect is executed by operating an operation unit whose operation is valid in the “operation valid state”. Examples of the “operation valid state” include an “operation valid state” formed by a predetermined period and an “operation valid state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special figure lottery effect performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special figure lottery effect is performed on the image display device 14. In the special figure lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The fluctuation display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined manner for a predetermined time. The stop display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the special effect symbol are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative pattern representing a number). In the variation display of special effect symbols, the special decoration symbols in each row move (variable display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the special effect symbol is not limited to this. In addition, during the special effect symbol change display, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, and a movie are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the special effect symbols, the three rows of the special decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of the special decoration symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the horizontal line at the center in the display area 140) when the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed indicates the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special figure lottery effect, a roulette effect performed at the time of the ordinary symbol lottery described later, a special game effect performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol fluctuation display or a special game are performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal waiting state (a so-called customer waiting state) that cannot be performed are performed.

  On the back surfaces of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal configuration of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. The power supply board 107 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y and monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, The power interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal goes to a high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal goes to a low level, the main CPU 101a enters an operation stopped state. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, but may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators) and the like, performs arithmetic processing relating to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, via an input port (not shown), a first starting opening detecting sensor 6a, a second starting opening detecting sensor 7a, a winning opening detecting sensor 8a, a first winning gate detecting. The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normally movable piece 70A of the second starting opening control device 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control. A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, and a normal symbol first display 62 are provided via an output port (not shown). , The first special symbol holding first display 63, the second special symbol holding first display 64, and the normal symbol holding first display 65 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each of the display devices 60 to 69.

  Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to an output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information related to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal plate 108. The game information output terminal plate 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button operation detection switch 18a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to an input side of the effect control board 102 via a lamp control board 104.

  The effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104 when the effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position. I do. The lamp control board 104 outputs an effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a to the effect control board 102.

  When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs an effect lever operation detection signal indicating to the lamp control board 104 that the effect lever 19A has been tilted. When the effect lever operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the signal to the effect control board 102.

  The sub CPU 102a includes a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button operation detection signal output from the effect button device 18, an effect lever operation detection signal output from the effect lever device 19, and a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on an input signal or the like, the program stored in the sub-ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the arithmetic processing. . The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs firing control for firing game balls and payout control for paying out game balls to a player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 in a bidirectional manner.

  The input side of the payout CPU 103a is connected to a touch sensor 32a and a knob 32b of a firing volume. The touch sensor 32a is mounted inside the firing handle 32. When a player or a clerk touches the firing handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the firing handle 32, and transmits a firing handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The launch volume knob 32 b is connected to the launch handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect a rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. When receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

  Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the turning angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the power of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information included in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the knob 32b of the firing volume, and fires the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing device 4. One game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation. Therefore, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  The output side of the payout control board 103 is connected to a payout drive unit 51 of a payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to a player. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to send a predetermined game ball to a player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, like the above-described boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, a lighting device 16 for production and an accessory device 17 for production are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a controls light emission of the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter, referred to as “effect control command”), and irradiates the effect lighting device 16 with light. The drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid and a motor for operating the special effect device 17 based on the effect control command. Furthermore, the lamp CPU 104a controls the drive of the electric motor 18b that moves the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command, and causes the LED 1821d of the effect button device 18 to emit light. Light emission control is performed.

  An effect button operation detection switch 18a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a and the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a are input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the input detection signal to the effect control board 102. . That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button operation detection signal and the effect lever operation detection signal between the effect control board 102 and the effect button device 18 and the effect lever device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14, and the audio output to the audio output device 15. And a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the voice generation unit 105C.

  The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The control CPU 105Aa is connected to a control ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and reads a control program necessary for the operation of the control CPU 105Aa. When receiving the command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the overall CPU 105Aa issues an instruction of an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generating unit 105B based on the command, and also sends an instruction to the sound generating unit 105C. An instruction for a sound to be output from the sound output device 15 is issued.

  The overall RAM 105Ac functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the overall CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the overall ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and includes a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generating program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio, which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14, and the like.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that has a frame buffer that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. Have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the image data based on an instruction from the general CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scenery, a character, and a speech, which constitutes a decorative design image or a background of the decorative design. Data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like consisting of a group of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  The CGROM 105Bb stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba generates a synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal, vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 by dividing the frequency of the pulse signal, and outputs it to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol) referred to in a jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol) referred to in a jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In any of the jackpot determination tables, a jackpot determination table referred to when a jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter, referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”). And a jackpot determination table referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value) (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability jackpot determination table”).

  Each jackpot determination table stores a jackpot determination value and a determination result in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, the “big hit”, “small hit” Either "hit" or "losing" is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the big hit game with the opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is "small hit", the small hit game with the opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game nor the small jackpot game is executed.

  Note that, in the floating effect as the special figure lottery effect, as described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. As the reach effect, for example, during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, the above-described special figure decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in two of the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14. (A part of the effect symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and when a predetermined special symbol decorative symbol stops on a predetermined activated line in the remaining one area, an array of special symbol decorative symbols indicating a jackpot win is obtained. There is a reach effect in which a state (a so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", the result of the jackpot determination is still "losing" even in the staging specific state of the reach state.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach effect, there is a case where a specific effect (so-called “super reach effect”) that enhances the expectation of the jackpot win is developed or not. Further, in the reach effect, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect that increases a player's expectation of winning a big hit without performing a reach state is performed. Note that if the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is basically performed in almost all cases.

  FIGS. 5A to 5C are diagrams illustrating an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 based on the result of the jackpot determination. (Special symbol stop display mode).

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the big hit determination (big hit, small hit, and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is a table when the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of the starting port (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7) in which the game ball which is the trigger for the special symbol determination is entered.

  In each special symbol determination table, a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the game is stopped and displayed by comparing the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the special symbol determination table. Special symbols are determined. As the identification information of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and a special effect symbol designation command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the special effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated at the start of the special symbol change display (at the time of the special symbol storage determination process in step S310) and transmitted to the effect control board 102.

  The special effect designating command is used to identify a special design display device (first special design first display 60 or second special design first display 61) in which the special design related to the special design determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60. If the MODE data is “E4H”, The second special symbol first display 61 indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special effect design specification command whose MODE data is “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect design specification command”, and the special effect design specification command whose MODE data is “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect design specification command”. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the big hit game control table used when controlling the big hit game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time, which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the special winning opening 8, and an opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the ending time that is the period from the end of the opening of the special winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the big hit game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  6 (b) to 6 (d) are diagrams illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening / closing control table for a jackpot game used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8. FIG. FIG. 6B is a table referred to in the first big hit game constituting the big hit game, and FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the second big hit game constituting the big hit game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The special winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 include a round number (R), which is a round game number, and a special telephone, which is the opening number of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a small hit game control table used when controlling a small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hitting game, an opening time, which is a period from when the small hitting game is started to when the first winning opening 8 is opened, and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the last opening of the special winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are associated with the type of the small hit, that is, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the small hit game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8. The big win opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big win 8 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 include a round number (R), a special power operation number (K) which is an opening number of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80), and a special winning The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the mouth 8 are set.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating an example of a game condition data determination table referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information indicating a game condition newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low-probability game state / high-probability game state), and in each of the divided tables, the special symbol type (special figure stop symbol data) and the game The condition data is uniquely associated with the condition data and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data indicates a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If “01H”, the jackpot winning probability is set to a high probability (high-probability game state) after the jackpot game, and if “00H”, the jackpot winning probability is low (low-probability game) after the jackpot game. State). On the other hand, the lower byte of the game condition data indicates the start opening winning easiness newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the starting opening prize easiness is set to be easy (time saving game state) after the jackpot game, and if “00H”, the starting opening prize easiness is difficult after the jackpot game (non-time saving game state). ).

  FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a new game condition to be set when the big hit game ends (at the time of the big hit game end processing). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting opening prize easiness are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data, each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag (high-probability flag and time-saving flag) indicating the game condition, and the number of times a special symbol can be changed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, referred to as “executable number”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times of execution of the special symbol display means the specified number of times of the special symbol change display according to the newly set game condition. It should be noted that the number of times this special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of times of the jackpot determination.

In this way, in the gaming machine Y, when the big hit game is executed, the main CPU 101a is more advantageous to the player after the big hit game ends than in the normal game state (low-probability game state and non-time saving game state). A specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) is set.
In this specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state), the main CPU 101a ends the specific game state when the number of times of the jackpot determination (the number of executable special symbol displays) reaches 84 times. I have. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table)
9 to 12 are diagrams illustrating examples of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation display mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “special figure variation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a process of determining a special figure variation pattern when the number of times of the special symbol change in the high-probability game state and the time saving game state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 1 to 30 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining a special figure variation pattern when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a case where the special figure change pattern is determined when the number of times the special symbol changes in the high probability game state and the time saving game state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 75 to 84 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
In addition, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when a special fluctuation pattern is determined in the high-probability game state and the non-time saving game state when the third jackpot is won, or is referred to when a small jackpot is won. Description of the special figure variation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) of the main ROM 101b and checks the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the time reduction flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated is checked, and the special figure fluctuates according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuating times. Select a pattern determination table.

  When determining that the current gaming state is the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table in FIG.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is 1 to 31, the main CPU 101a refers to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time saving game state and the number of times the special symbol changes is 31 to 74, the main CPU 101a refers to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is 75 to 84 times, the main CPU 101a refers to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, or when the small hit is won, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  The special figure variation pattern determination table includes special figure stop symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display, and Stored are the number of reservations (U1 or U2), a reach determination value for determining the presence or absence of reach, and a special figure variation pattern determination value for determining a special figure variation pattern.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H” or “20H” or “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a sets the game ball to the first starting port 6 or the second starting port. 7 is compared with the special figure variation pattern determination random number (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data, which is obtained when the ball 7 is entered. To determine.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (loss), the main CPU 101a checks the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination processing. . The main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure reservation number (U1 or U2), and determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern of “reach without loss” Alternatively, it is determined whether the pattern is a special figure variation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  Note that the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the special figure reservation number, but when determining the special figure variation pattern of “losing without reach” or the special figure variation pattern of “losing with reach” Does not refer to “4” as the number of reserved balls.

  When determining the “losing without reach”, the main CPU 101a compares the acquired random number for torsional pattern variation pattern determination with the torsional figure variation pattern determination value (0 to 255) allocated according to “losing without reach”. Then, a special figure variation pattern is determined.

  When determining “losing with reach”, the main CPU 101a compares the acquired random numbers for torsional pattern fluctuation pattern determination with the torsional figure fluctuation pattern determination values (0 to 255) allocated according to “losing with reach”. Then, a special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 101a determines a special figure variation pattern by a special figure variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the special symbol variation display (at the time of the special symbol storage determination processing in step S300).

  The special figure change pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the change display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure change time”). It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern is a first special figure variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol first display 60, and a second special symbol first display 61. It is distinguished from a second special figure variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the displayed second special symbol.

  The main CPU 101a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes a jackpot winning expectation (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The expectation (reliability) of winning the first jackpot and the second jackpot is associated with each other.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the effect contents based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as described later. In the rightmost column of the special pattern change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the effect type of the change effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special figure change pattern designation command for reference. ing.

  Here, as the effect contents, “design change” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, the “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, in which a part of a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effect symbols fluctuate. Means For example, when a combination of special effect symbols of three digits of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot, two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7” and the remaining special effect symbols are stopped. This refers to a mode in which the effect symbols fluctuate. Note that the “temporary stop” refers to a mode in which the special effect symbol fluctuates or deforms slightly to indicate to the player that the special effect symbol is fluctuating.

  In the effect type of the variable effect shown in FIG. 9, “symbol change 1” to “symbol change 3” are “losing” as the determination result of the jackpot determination without the reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. It is a fluctuating effect that informs the user. “Symbol variation 1” is “shortened variation” performed in a very short special figure variation time of 4 seconds. “Symbol variation 2” and “Symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special figure variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  The “normal reach” illustrated in FIG. 9 stops and displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. This is a variable production that performs a reach production.

  “Normal reach → Story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect executed when the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or small hit. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach in which two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change for changing and displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, the story reach is performed as a reach production that has a higher expectation of the jackpot than the normal reach. In this story reach, the character that appears also in the following challenge reach goes on a journey to find a pet dog that disappeared, and finally finds a pet dog and suggests that the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or small jackpot It is a reach production consisting of a story of the content.

  “Symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect performed when the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or small hit. This “symbol change 2 → challenge reach” stops and displays the two special effects symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after “symbol variation 2” and also in the story reach. The appearing character challenges a treasure hunting game in which the character searches for a target item from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character acquires the item to indicate that the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small jackpot. The content is a challenge reach.

  “Symbol variation 3 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after “symbol variation 3”.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” shown in FIG. 9 is such that two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are changed to the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. This is a variable effect in which a normal reach for stop display is performed, and thereafter, a super reach having a higher degree of expectation for a jackpot than the normal reach is performed.

  “Normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of special effect symbols have the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. This is a variable effect in which normal reach for stop display is performed, and then special reach having a higher degree of expectation for a jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed.

  In addition, the “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a normal reach is performed, then a super reach is performed, and then a special reach is performed, after a pattern change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first big hit where the stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination value. And "E6H0CH", the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure change pattern designation command determined in the case of the second big hit where the stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure change pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined in the case of a loss in which the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination value. And "E6H07H", the selection ratio becomes lower.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the “normal reach → super reach” of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037”. Is executed, and when “E6H0BH” is received as a variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” is executed. When it is determined to execute and when “E6H0CH” is received as the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern A042” to “variation effect pattern A045” Decided to run To.

Later, as the variable effects in the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable effects of “variable effect pattern A034”, “variable effect pattern A038”, and “variable effect pattern A042” will be described.
Explaining the degree of expectation for the jackpot of “fluctuation effect pattern A034”, “fluctuation effect pattern A038”, and “fluctuation effect pattern A042”. “Variable effect pattern A034” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Variable effect of“ normal reach → special reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives“ E6H0BH ” As the “pattern A038” and the “variable effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the big hit increases.

  In addition, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are special figure variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special figure fluctuation times are “symbol fluctuation 1” to “symbol fluctuation 3” shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time at the time of execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the “special figure change pattern 30” for executing “symbol change 1”, which is the shortest special figure change time of 2 seconds, is set to 4 times in the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of “special figure variation pattern 00” for executing “symbol variation 1” for seconds.

  In addition, “Symbol change → special character reach 1” to “symbol change → special character reach 6” illustrated in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B, which will be described later, after a pattern change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed. It is a fluctuating production that performs a special character reach. The details of the special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Further, in the effect type of the variable effect shown in FIG. 11, “symbol change 1” to “symbol change 3” are variable effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect corresponding to a special figure variable time. Are different in production time.

  “Symbol change → attack reach 1” to “symbol change → attack reach 6” illustrated in FIG. 11 are attack reach contents in which different characters attack each other after a pattern change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. It is a variable production that performs The details of the attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special figure fluctuation pattern for executing a fluctuation effect of a very short time such as a special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, “Janken production (losing 1)” to “Janken production (losing 6)”, “Janken production (win 1)” to “Janken production (win 3)”, “Janken production (Aiko 1)” "~ Janken production (Aiko 3)" is a display of two or more special production designs, after which the two special production designs (left design and right design) are stopped at the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a variable effect in which a “reaching effect” in which two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform a janken effect.

“Janken effect (losing 1)” to “Janken effect (losing 6)” are variable effects that are executed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. “Janken effect (Win 1)” to “Janken effect (Win 3)” are variable effects executed when the result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot or the second jackpot. “Janken effect (Aiko 1)” to “Janken effect (Aiko 3)” are variable effects executed when the result of the jackpot determination is “third big hit” or “small hit”.
The details of the “Janken effect” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  In addition, a starting opening winning designation command and a special figure change pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure change pattern. The starting opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first advance determination or the second advance determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first advance determination or the second advance determination. The special figure variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure variation pattern determination.

  The special figure variation pattern designation command identifies the special symbol display device (the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. And one byte of DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol first display 60, and if the MODE data is "E7H". , The second special symbol first display 61 indicates that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern specification command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is “E7H” is referred to as “second special figure fluctuation pattern specification command”. Special figure variation pattern designation command. "

  The starting port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the starting port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start port 7 Indicates that a game ball has entered. In addition, the command for the starting opening winning designation command whose MODE data is “E1H” is “first starting opening winning designation command”, and the starting opening winning designation command for MODE data is “E2H” is referred to as the “second starting opening winning designation command”. "

  FIGS. 13A to 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting port 7. The hit determination is performed based on a hit determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game balls through the winning gates 9 and 10, as described later.

  The winning determination table is divided according to the starting port winning easiness. Specifically, the winning determination table is divided into a winning determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a winning determination table referenced in the time-saving gaming state.

  Each hit determination table stores a hit determination value and a determination result in a uniquely associated manner. By comparing the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, one of “hit” and “loss” is determined. When the "win" is won, an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. The ordinary symbol determination is to determine the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol first display 62. Normally, the symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each of the ordinary symbol determination tables, the ordinary symbol determination value and the stationary symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the identification information of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designating command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 13C determines the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, “ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern”) associated with the time required for the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, “ordinary symbol fluctuation time”). FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a general-purpose variation pattern determination table for the present invention. The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the non-time saving game state and a general figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the time saving game state.

  In each table, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of normal pattern fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the universal figure variation pattern is determined by comparing the universal figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the universal figure variation pattern determination table. You.

  A general figure fluctuation pattern designation command is set corresponding to the general figure fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal figure change pattern is determined. When the effect control board 102 receives the ordinary symbol variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started from now on, and the recognition result of the ordinary symbol determination related to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is recognized. it can.

  The general-figure variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the game state related to the current start opening winning easiness, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the general-figure variation pattern. I have. Regarding the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it indicates that the game is in the non-time saving game state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it indicates that the game is in the time saving game state.

  FIG. 13D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning easiness and the ordinary figure stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning easiness state at the time of the normal symbol determination and the result of the normal symbol determination.

  FIG. 13E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in the auxiliary game control table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. An opening designation command, a type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second opening 7, an ending time that is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. Conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13 (f) is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start-up opening / closing control table for an auxiliary game used to control opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7. The second start-up opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7 during the auxiliary game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7 include a general power operation number (D), which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, and a 2 The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Description of types of special games)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game with the opening of the special winning opening 8 (the operation of the special winning opening control device 80) includes a “big hit game” executed when the “big hit” is won, and a “small hit”. And a "small hit game" that is executed when winning. The jackpot games are mainly classified into “first jackpot games”, “second jackpot games”, and “third jackpot games” according to the difference in the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening number) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason why "can be opened" is that the number of game balls that can enter the special winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 has not been opened the maximum number of times, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may be ended. In addition, the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, a description will be given of a game condition that is a condition when the game proceeds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. Regarding the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, and the game progresses under the time-short game state or the non-time-short game state with respect to the easy opening of the game balls. I do. The initial (at power-on) game condition is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are referred to as a normal game state.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of possible jackpots per unit time becomes relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the starting port winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state, the time required for the normal symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 15 seconds, and the second symbol is activated when the "win" is won in the hit determination. (2) The total operation time of the start-up opening control device 70 (opening time of the second start-up opening 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in a normal symbol hit determination is 1 /. It means that it is set to 50. In addition, the "total opening time" indicates that the second starting port 7 may be opened a plurality of times for one hit, and a game ball can be won for one hit. This is because the number of the game balls is limited, and when the game balls win, the game balls close without waiting for the opening time to elapse.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting-port control device 70) is longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Indicates a game state in which the game is likely to be opened. Since the start opening winning easiness is relatively high, the number of possible executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpots per unit time inevitably. It can be said that the state is advantageous to the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the normal time fluctuating time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total of the maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds. Is set to 1/5. In other words, all the components of the starting port winning easiness are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time saving game state. In the time-saving gaming state, the second start-up port 7 is opened twice through a 1.0-second closure (interval). However, the second opening 7 does not have to be closed and may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting ports 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate firing handle 32. Even so, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-time saving game state, so that a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player can be suppressed. That is, also from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

  In this manner, the type of the jackpot game (first to third jackpot games), the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, the non-time-saving game state, Or a combination with a time-saving gaming state). In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of the jackpot based on the profit level enjoyed by the player) is the type of the jackpot game to be executed and the game condition ( Game state). Therefore, hereinafter, separately from the type of the jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, a combination of the type of the jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game condition after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of the profit enjoyed by the player The type of jackpot.

  By the jackpot winning, a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) to execute a jackpot game (first jackpot game) and thereafter set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is referred to as a “first jackpot”. By the winning, a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 4R (round) to execute a jackpot game (“second jackpot game”), and thereafter, the jackpot set to the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is referred to as “second jackpot”. A jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 2R (round) to execute a jackpot game (“third jackpot game”), and thereafter, the jackpot set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is referred to as “third jackpot”.

  When the big hit is won, the normal game state is set when the big hit game starts regardless of the state before the big hit game. In other words, during the jackpot game, the game state becomes the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state. On the other hand, even if a small win is won, the game condition does not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning is continued during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that the initialization process has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number including the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in a register of the main CPU 101a to a stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game timer counter for performing a process of updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a process of updating the stop time of the special symbol, a process of updating the opening time, a process of updating the opening and closing time of the special winning opening 8, Further, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter for updating the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, updating the stop time of the ordinary symbol, and updating the opening / closing time of the second starting port 7 is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a hit determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number updating process for updating the initial value random number for jackpot determination, the initial value random number for special symbols, and the initial value random number for hit determination.

  For updating various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly added from the initial value random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process of determining whether a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, a first special symbol reservation first display 63, a second special symbol reservation first display 64, And special figure special electric power control processing (special design related processing) for controlling the special winning opening control device 80 (control of special design related equipment) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol first display 62, the normal symbol holding first display 65, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Control processing (normal pattern processing) is performed.

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose general-purpose processing data in the general-purpose general-purpose control processing (normal symbol-related processing), refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose general-purpose processing data, and executes If the processing data = 0, a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (the second starting port 7 is open) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning in the winning gates 9 and 10 Performing a normal symbol storage determination process including a normal symbol, etc., and if the general symbol data processing data = 1, perform a normal symbol variation process when the normal symbol first display 62 fluctuates based on the normal symbol determination, If the general figure processing data = 2, the normal symbol stop processing when the general design first display 62 is stopped is performed, and if the general figure processing data = 3, the second starting port 7 is set. Opening / closing control (operation of the second starting port control device 70) Perform the technique processing.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the prize ball counters corresponding to the starting ports (the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7), the special winning port 8, and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. Is checked, and if it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process of subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a outputs external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data (starting opening / closing solenoid driving data and special winning opening / closing solenoid driving data) for driving the 80B, the first special design first display 60, the second special design first display 61, and the first special design first display 61 Display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbol) for displaying a predetermined symbol on the special symbol retaining first display 63 or the second special symbol retaining first display 64 Perform data creation processing of (pending display data).

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to light each LED of the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol holding first display 63, and the second special symbol holding second display 64. Next, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another substrate is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to a register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the detection signal is not input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S220. When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to a general winning opening prize ball counter used for a winning ball.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 8. If the detection signal has not been input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S230. When a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to a special winning opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball, updates the data, and updates the special winning opening 8 with a prize. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a have been input, that is, whether or not the game balls have passed through the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether there is a valid detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, in step S232, the starting opening prize ball counter is incremented by "1" and updated, and the first starting entrance ball of the main RAM 101c is updated. The first starting port winning flag is turned on in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter for counting the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure reservation is performed in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding "1". Also, in step S234, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds to update the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold first display 63. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a transmits the special determination information including the random numbers indicated by the random number counter for jackpot determination, the random number counter for special symbol determination, the random number counter for reach determination, and the random number counter for special figure variation pattern determination to the first special It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are stored in the storage sections where the random numbers are not stored. The data is stored sequentially from the smaller storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination based on a game ball entering the first starting port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first preliminary determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage area, The first special figure change pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure variation pattern as the first preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination processing (S313).

  Then, in step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first starting port winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a. When determining that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that there is a valid detection signal, moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds and updates the starting opening prize ball counter by “1”, adds and updates the second starting opening ball entering counter by “1”, and updates the starting opening prize ball counter of the main RAM 101c. The second starting port entry flag is turned on in the winning flag storage area. The second starting-port entrance regulation counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting port 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter that counts the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, moves the process to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure reservation number counter and updates it. In addition, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in order to update the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold first display 64. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a outputs the special determination information including the random numbers indicated by the random number counter for jackpot determination, the random number counter for special symbol determination, the random number counter for reach determination, and the random number counter for special figure variation pattern determination to the second special It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are stored in a storage section where no random number is stored. The data is stored sequentially from the smaller storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  Then, the main CPU 101a makes a second preliminary determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second preliminary determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol holding storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure variation pattern as the second preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313).

  Then, in step S247, the main CPU 101a sets, in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, the second starting port winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second preliminary determination. .

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a, 10a. When determining that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that there is a valid detection signal, moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the ordinary symbol holding number counter for counting the number of ordinary symbols holding (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, moves the process to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds and updates the counter value (G) of the ordinary drawing reservation number counter by “1”. Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the ordinary symbol holding number (G) displayed on the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 with the ordinary symbol holding display data indicating the number of held symbols in the main RAM 101c. Set to the area.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the respective random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the general symbol variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and executes the winning gate detection signal input processing. To end.

  Usually, the symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14 (c)), and various random numbers are stored in a storage section having a smaller number among storage sections in which random numbers are not stored. Are stored sequentially. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the special figure special power control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302. If the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310) If the special figure special power processing data = 1, the processing is shifted to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special figure special power processing data = 2, the processing is shifted to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the processing is shifted to the big hit game processing (step S340). If the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the processing is shifted to the jackpot game end processing (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed. If it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If it is determined that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer processing.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol holding number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-3, and shifts the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. The process is performed, and each data stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage section of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special symbol storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to a special symbol storage area (0th storage section) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol holding number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and shifts the data stored in the first special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. I do.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (zero storage unit), and the data stored in the zero storage unit is deleted. Is done. As a result, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  In order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) in accordance with the data shift processing (reservation digestion processing) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the starting port related to the data. The suspension display data includes information on the type of the special symbol suspension display device and information on the special symbol suspension number (U1 or U2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol holding storage area. The first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area may be shifted in the order in which the balls are entered, or the first special symbol storage area may be shifted in preference to the second special symbol storage area. May be.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not one or more, the process proceeds to a customer waiting state setting process in steps S319-1 to S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination processing ends, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demonstration determination flag "01H" in the demonstration determination flag storage area so that the demonstration designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes a jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big hit determination process is to be performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the opening is the first starting port 6, the main CPU 101a selects a first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is not the first startup port 6 (it is the second startup port 7), in step S311-3, it selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is set in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high probability gaming state.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag in the high-probability flag storage area is ON, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "First high probability jackpot determination table" or "second high probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  On the other hand, when determining that the flag is not turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, the main CPU 101a further proceeds to step S311-6 from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table" or "second low probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a stores the jackpot determination random number shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the zeroth storage unit in the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. It is compared with the "decision table" or the "low-probability jackpot determination table" to determine which of "big hit", "small hit" and "losing", and ends the big hit determination processing.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is "big hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for a big hit in step S312-3, and if it is not determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S312. The processing is shifted to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is "small hit". Here, when it is determined to be "small hit", the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S312-4, and when not determined to be "small hit", shifts the processing to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7), and In step S310-6, the special random number for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for big hit winning (FIG. 5 (a)), whereby the special big hit symbol is determined. Perform the special symbol determination to be determined.

  In step S312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (first starting port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol that determines the special winning special symbol by comparing the special symbol determining random value in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determining value of the special winning determination special symbol determination table (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7), In S310-6, the special symbol for random determination is stored in the 0th storage unit and the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5B) is compared to determine a special symbol for loss. To make a special symbol.

  Then, in step S312-6, a special effect design specification command is determined based on the result of the special design determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5, and the determined special effect design specification command is directed. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines, based on the results of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, stop symbol data relating to the special symbol (hereinafter, “special symbol stop”). That is, the type of the special symbol is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The determined special figure stop symbol data is, as described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure change pattern determination processing of FIG. 25, the special design stop processing of FIG. When determining the "special symbol" or the like, it is also used in determining the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 28 or the small hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks the high-probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by comparing the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and is stored in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process illustrated in FIG. 22, and performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, and the reach determination result, the time required for the variation display of the (from now on) special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure variation time) and A special figure change pattern including information on the effect type and the like of the change effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON or OFF of the high probability flag and the ON or OFF of the time reduction flag in the game condition determination table of FIG. Game state, low-probability game state, time-saving game state, or non-time-saving game state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S313-3, and shifts the processing to step S313-3. If it is a gaming state, the process moves to step S313-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of change display of the special symbol to be started (1 to 30 times, 31 to 74 times, 75 to 84 times). Times).

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines that the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (step S313-2). YES), the special figure variation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol variation display confirmed in step S313-3.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is “losing”, the main CPU 101a further executes the special figure variation pattern determination process. Check the pending number (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a obtains the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure reservation number (U1 or U2), and obtains the special map of “reach without loss”. It is determined whether the pattern is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a determines a special figure variation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 101a obtains the special figure variation pattern determination random number, and stores the obtained special figure variation pattern determination random number and the determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special figure variation pattern determination table. Collation is performed to determine a special figure change pattern.

After determining the special figure variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, transmits the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern to the main RAM 101c for production. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the special symbol starts by receiving this command, and finally designates the special figure variation pattern designation. A variable effect pattern associated with the content of the variable effect is determined based on the command.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a checks the state of the game condition at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and sets a game state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  Then, in step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure variation time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure variation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for performing variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be activated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  The main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area in step S310-11, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets the special figure special power processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol storage determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol changing process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the change display of the special symbol does not end, the special symbol change process ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol change display is to be ended, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a sets a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the special symbol change display is to be ended. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol set in step S312-13 to stop and display the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61. The special figure stop display data is set based on the stop symbol data. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure stop time”; for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. It should be noted that the special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag, and ends the special symbol changing process.

Next, the special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing. Transfer processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is set in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area means that the game is currently in the time saving game state. If the flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3, and if the flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a determines “1” from the counter value of the remaining number-of-times counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special symbol according to the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of time-saving game states”). ”Is subtracted and stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0. If the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5, and if not, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. In addition, the fact that the number of remaining time saving game states (J) becomes “0” means that the number of times the special symbol can be changed is displayed in the time saving game state (Ja), and the number of times the special symbol is changed in the “time saving” state is displayed. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag has been turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in the high-probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high-probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a sets the counter value of the high-probability game state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol change display according to the high-probability game state (X: hereinafter, referred to as “high-probability game state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from the stored value is stored as the new high-probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0 is not 0, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. In addition, the fact that the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) becomes “0” means that the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed (Xa) in the high-probability game state, Means that the variable display of is ended.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a checks the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the transmission data storage area for effect.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol stop processing is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a special jackpot symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). I do. Here, if it is determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and if it is not determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop processing is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, if it is determined that the small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special power processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (the time saving flag storage area and the high probability flag storage area), the remaining change frequency counter of the high probability game state, and the remaining change frequency counter of the time reduction game state. I do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. The opening here means a period from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the special winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is determined which of the big hits is in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data, a special winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the big hit is selected, and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, a long winning game large winning opening opening / closing control table or a short winning gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores it. Since no round game has been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game number storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value (special power operation number (K)) stored in the special power operation number storage area and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a sets the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c to energize the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the special winning opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special power operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 ( The operation time of the special winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is for transmitting information to the effect control board 102 that the round game is started. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long per game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the jackpot game process ends without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the effect display is performed on the image display device 14, for example, as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here means a period from the end of all round games set in advance (after the last opening of the special winning opening 8 ends) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending is not currently being performed, step S340-7 is performed. Transfer processing to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is being opened, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. I do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9) in a round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0. ) Has been adopted. Then, when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energizing stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c to close the special winning opening 8, and the special winning opening opening and closing determined in step S340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and the special power operation number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operation number (K) is equal to the number of open times set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9 pieces). ), The condition is terminated, and it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the big hit game process is completed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in the step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed in a step S340-11. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process ends, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot is confirmed in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data, and an ending designation command associated with the type of the jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of the jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S340-18 and proceeds to step S340-18. If it is determined that the game has not been completed, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hitting game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hitting game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a special winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the special winning opening / closing control table for the small winning game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value (special power operation number (K)) stored in the special power operation number storage area and stored. Then, in order to open the special winning opening 8, the energization start data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special electric power activation is referred to by referring to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game ends.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here is a period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that the game is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that the game is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. When determining that the special winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-10, and when determining that the special winning opening 8 is open, the process proceeds to step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) or one open time of the special winning opening 8 has elapsed (special game timer counter). = 0). Then, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-8 when determining that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the small hitting game processing when determining that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. I do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energizing stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set to close the special winning opening 8, and the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3 is referred to. The closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current special power operation number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hitting game ending condition is satisfied. The small hitting game ending condition is that the special power operation number (K) is equal to the number of times the large winning opening 8 is opened in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is set to a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. Then, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-11 when it is determined that the small hitting game ending condition is satisfied, and proceeds to the small hitting game processing when it is determined that the small hitting game ending condition is not satisfied. To end.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special power operation number storage area and sets “0” in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as small hitting game end processing. That is, the special power operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the small hit in the transmission data storage area for effect based on the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the ending time corresponding to the type of the small hit. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the case of the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hitting game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, shifts the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-14, in which the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the small hitting game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special power processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. When determining that the high-probability flag is not ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S360-4, and when determining that the high-probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, stores the high-probability flag in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high-probability game state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is turned on in the time-saving flag storage area. When determining that the time-saving flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S360-6, and when determining that the time-saving flag is turned on, in step S360-5, stores the time-saving flag (01H) in the time-saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time saving game state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the current state of the game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S360-7, The figure special power processing data is set to 0, and the processing shifts to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

(Main processing by the production control board)
Next, a process executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and performs a process of initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of updating the effect random number used to control the effect including the special effect determination random number, the variation effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  In addition, a random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the process of updating the random number for effect, the random number counter provided for each type of random number is incremented by "1". Various random numbers constituting the effect random number have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of the random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to be able to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from completely synchronizing, instead of making the maximum values of various random number ranges different, different initial value random numbers are provided for various production random numbers, In updating the random numbers, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by effect control board)
The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102 generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed.

  In this timer interrupt processing, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process of updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in a reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the received command in step S1300 is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process. Details of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by the production control board)
The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a receives a new command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. When determining that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process, and shifts the process to step S1302 when determining that the command has been received.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303, and shifts to step S1304 if it determines that the command is not a demonstration designation command.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a preliminary process for executing the demonstration effect, and sets a time period until the demonstration effect starts (demonstration effect standby). Is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, shifts the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a starting opening winning designation command storage process. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command in the effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the start opening winning designation command storage processing.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of starting port (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start-up winning designation command, confirms the type of the start-up opening (the first start-up opening 6 or the second start-up opening 7) related to the start-up opening winning designation command, and determines the type of the start-up opening. Is stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to.

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section for each type of starting ports 6 and 7. The starting opening winning designation command is stored in order from a storage unit having a smaller number in a storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

  In addition, each storage unit stores a starting opening winning designation command unit that stores a starting opening winning designation command, and effect data of an effect performed based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the starting opening winning designation command unit. Effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307, and shifts the processing to step S1308 when determining that there is no game state specification command.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the game state indicated by the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designating command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1309, and if it determines that there is no special effect symbol designating command, shifts the processing to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and performs the special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process ends. In the special effect symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect symbol designating command, and based on the information of the received special effect symbol designating command, stops the special effect in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display of the symbol, that is, the special effect symbol is determined.

  In step S1310, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311. If it determines that there is no special figure variation pattern designation command, it shifts the processing to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol variable display is performed, and indicates a variable effect indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (variable display of the special effect symbol display). (Including a variable effect pattern) is determined, and the command analysis process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to steps S1313 and S1314. If it determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Transfer processing.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating stop display of the special effect symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. By receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variable effect ends, terminate the variable effect, and stop display of the special effect symbol. . The end time of the present effect is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event in the effect during the variable effect.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect data stored in the sub RAM 102c described below.

  In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode when the change display of the special symbol ends, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of the variable effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to the special symbol lottery (or the variable display of the special symbol). , Game conditions and the like.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command for a special game. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316, and shifts the process to step S1317 when determining that there is no special game opening designation command.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is a mode of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1318, and shifts the processing to step S1319 when determining that there is no round designation command.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command for a special game (special game ending designation command). When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1320, and ends the command analysis process when determining that the command is not the special game ending designation command.

  In step S1320, sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an ending effect mode, and ends the command analysis process.

  Here, a variable effect pattern determination table used in a variable effect pattern determination process (FIG. 35) described below will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a sets the special figure variation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current game state. A process of determining a variation effect pattern is performed from the associated variation effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state described later.
FIG. 41 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode B set in the high probability game state and the special figure change frequency of 1 to 30 times in the time saving game state, which will be described later. Is shown.
FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode C set in the special probability variation times 31 to 74 in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state described later. Is shown.
FIG. 43 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode D set in the high probability game state and the special figure change frequency of 75 to 84 times in the time saving game state, which will be described later. Is shown.

  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 include a special symbol determination result (judgment result of jackpot determination), a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, and a variation corresponding to the special figure variation time. The effect time (s) of the effect, the variable effect pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the variable effect pattern, the variable effect pattern determined according to the variable effect pattern determination value, and the variable effect pattern The effect contents of the variable effects are stored in association with the presence / absence (execution (実 行), non-execution (×)) of each special effect in the variable effects based on the variable effect patterns.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
The variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state in FIG. 40 indicates the player's expectation as to whether or not the first big hit or the second big hit is won. In order to give to the first big hit or the second big hit, as a variable effect pattern different in the degree of expectation, a variable effect pattern in which super reach is executed after execution of normal reach and a variable effect pattern in which special reach is executed after execution of normal reach And a variable effect of executing super reach after execution of normal reach and then executing special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player an expectation of whether or not to win the third jackpot or small hit, a variable effect pattern in which story reach is executed after execution of normal reach, and a variable effect pattern in which challenge reach is executed after execution of normal reach. And

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A in FIG. 40, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. , Any one of “fluctuation effect pattern A001” to “fluctuation effect pattern A003” is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A001” to “variable effect patterns A003” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1- 3)), a variable effect that notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, if “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” Either is determined.

  In the variable effect of “variable effect pattern A004” to “variable effect pattern A006”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol change A2-1” to “symbol change A2-3”). )), Which is a variable effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A007” to “variation effect pattern A009” Either is determined.

  In the variable effects of “variable effect pattern A007” to “variable effect pattern A009”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol change A3-1” to “symbol change A3-3”). ), A fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is “losing”, if “E6H03H” or “E7H03H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any one of “variation effect pattern A010” to “variation effect pattern A012” Is determined.

  The variable effects of “variable effect pattern A010” to “variable effect pattern A012” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-3”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-3”) in which two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and a change that notifies that the jackpot determination result is a loss. It is a production.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is “losing”, if “E6H07H” or “E7H07H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any one of “variation effect pattern A022” to “variation effect pattern A025” Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A022” to “variable effect patterns A025” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, the super reach (which has a higher expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) “Super reach A1-1” to “super reach A1-4”), and a fluctuation effect to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H08H” or “E7H08H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any one of “variation effect pattern A026” to “variation effect pattern A029” Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A026” to “variable effect patterns A029” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher than the normal reach and the super reach. This is a fluctuation effect in which special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") is performed and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  If the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H09H” or “E7H09H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, one of “variation effect pattern A030” to “variation effect pattern A033” Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A030” to “variable effect patterns A033” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, the super reach (which has a higher expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) After performing “Super Reach A1-1” to “Super Reach A1-4”), special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) having a higher expectation for a jackpot than Super Reach Is performed to notify that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, if “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037” Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A034” to “variable effect patterns A037” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, the super reach (which has a higher expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) “Super reach A1-1” to “super reach A1-4”), and a variation effect that informs that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, when “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” Either is determined.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns A038” to “variable effect patterns A041” are a plurality of special effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and 2 of special effect symbols. Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher than the normal reach and the super reach. This is a fluctuation effect in which special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") is performed and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When "E6H0CH" or "E7H0CH" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designating command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, among "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A042” to the “variable effect pattern A045” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”). Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, the super reach (which has a higher expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) After performing “Super Reach A1-1” to “Super Reach A1-4”), special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) having a higher expectation for a jackpot than Super Reach Is performed to notify that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H10H" or "E7H10H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, one of "variation effect pattern A058" to "variation effect pattern A060" Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A058” to the “variable effect pattern A060” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-3”), and 2 of the special effect symbols. The character reaches the normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) in which the three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, as described above, the character that also appears in the challenge reach Go on a journey to find a pet dog whose disappearance disappears, and finally find a pet dog to indicate that the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small jackpot. A story reach (“Story reach A1-1”) "~" Story reach A1-3 "), and it is a fluctuation effect that informs that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. .

  As described above, after the "pattern variation 2", the variation effect of "variation effect pattern A061" to "variation effect pattern A063" is a challenge in a treasure hunting game in which a character searches for a sword of a target item from a plurality of treasure chests as described above. The challenge reach (“Challenge reach A1-1” to “Challenge reach A1-3”) indicates that the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or small hit by the character acquiring the item. Is performed to notify that the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

  In the variation production of “variation production pattern A064” to “variation production pattern A066”, after “design variation 3”, the character challenges a treasure hunting game in which a character searches for a cloak of a target item from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character acquires. A challenge reach (“Challenge Reach A2-1” to “Challenge Reach A2-3”) that indicates that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item to be performed This is a variable effect informing that the determination result is the third big hit or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

  In the fluctuating effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, “variable effect pattern A001” to “fluctuating effect pattern A075” have special effects as “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A”, “decision”. Information indicating that the effect “A” is executed (○) and not executed (×) is associated with the effect.

  Here, as described later, the “line announcement” means that a rendering image in which a character described later speaks any one of a plurality of lines having different degrees of expectation for the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 14, thereby forming a jackpot game. Is performed, and the result of the determination of the jackpot is an announcement effect giving a sense of expectation that the jackpot is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A5” of “line announcement A” is executed as “line announcement”.

  In addition, the “character announcement”, as described later, notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying any image of a plurality of characters having different degrees of expectation for the jackpot on the image display device 14, This is an announcement effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of “character announcement A1” to “character announcement A5” of “character announcement A” is executed as “character announcement”.

  Further, the “development notice” depends on the state of the effect button 18A (non-projecting state or projecting state) or the type of the effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, as described later. In addition to announcing the possibility of developing from the current production to the next production with a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot, and reporting the possibility of executing the jackpot game, the expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot It is a notice effect to give. In the effect mode A, as described later, “development notice A1” or “development notice A2” of “development notice A” is executed as “development notice”.

  In addition, as described later, the “determined effect” is an effect that informs the user of the determination of a jackpot hit. If the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of loss, the effect is such that the first decorative member 17A is not operated. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, “determined effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “determined effect A” is executed as “determined effect”.

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “fluctuating effect pattern A034”, execution of “line notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” (○), “fixed effect” Information indicating that “A” is not executed (×).
If the “variable effect pattern A034” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1311-6 that “serif notice A” and “character notice A” are special effects. , Confirm that the “advance notice A” is to be executed.

The fluctuating effect performed in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state, which is easier to win in the jackpot than in the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, is a simple effect that is not overpowered by the notice effect.
In addition, the maximum of 84 fluctuating effects performed in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state are effect modes B in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is 1 to 30 times and the special figure fluctuation frequency 31 times to prevent redundancy. Different effects are produced in the effect mode C performed 74 times and in the effect mode D performed 75 to 84 times as the number of special figure changes.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 41 is a high-probability game state and a time-short game state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low-probability game state and the non-short-time game state. Is a fluctuation effect pattern of the fluctuation effect executed when the special figure fluctuation frequency is 1 to 30 times.

  In such a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the player usually has an expectation that the jackpot will be easily won. Therefore, in the effect mode B, in order to give the player an expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period in which the number of special figure changes is small, the fluctuation of the effect mode A is changed in the special figure change number of 1 to 30 times. The effect content is to perform a simple fluctuating effect than the effect.

  In the effect mode B, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure change time is longer than that of the effect mode A so that the change effect of the next special figure change number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a variable effect pattern of a variable effect of 2 seconds at a high rate. In addition, when the character reaches the reach after the special effect symbol changes, only the “special character reach”, which means that characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other, is executed.

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B in FIG. 41, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. Is determined as “fluctuation effect pattern B001” or “fluctuation effect pattern B002”.

  In the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern B001” and the “variation effect pattern B002”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the fluctuation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“Symbol fluctuation B1-1”, “Symbol fluctuation B1- 2)), a variable effect that notifies that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B003” or “variation effect pattern B004” is determined. You. Further, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, and “E6H32H” or “E7H32H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B005” or “variation effect pattern B006” is determined. You.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns B003” to “variable effect patterns B006” are displayed by changing a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol change B2-1”, “symbol change B2-2”, “symbol change B3-1”). , “Symbol variation B3-2”), a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H33H” or “E7H33H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B007” or “variation effect pattern B008” is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern specification command “E6H34H” or “E7H34H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern B009” or “variation effect pattern B010” is changed to the special figure variation pattern specification command “E6H35H” or “ When the “E7H35H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern B011” or “fluctuating effect pattern B012” is set, and when the special figure changing pattern designating command “E6H36H” or “E7H36H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern” is determined. In the case where “B013” or “fluctuating effect pattern B014” is determined to be the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command “E6H37H” or “E7H37H”, “fluctuating effect pattern B015” or “fluctuating effect pattern B016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern specification command “E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns B007” to “variable effect patterns B018” are a plurality of special effect symbols that are variably displayed (“symbol change B3-1”, “symbol change B3-2”, “symbol change B2-1”). , "Design variation B2-2"), and then special characters ("special character reach B4-1", "special character reach B4-2", "special character reach B5-1", "special character reach") in which special characters appear Special character reach B5-2, special character reach B6-1, special character reach B6-2, special character reach B1-1, special character reach B1-2, special character reach B2- 1), “special character reach B2-2”, “special character reach B3-1”, and “special character reach B3-2”), and informs that the jackpot judgment result is a loss. It is.

  If the special symbol determination result is the first big hit and “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B019” or “variation effect pattern B020” is determined. You. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” is determined, the “variation effect pattern B021” or “variation effect pattern B022” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern B023" or the "fluctuation effect pattern B024" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns B019” to “variation effect patterns B024”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”). Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B1-1", "Special character reach B1-2", "Special character reach B2-1", "Special character reach B2-2", "Special character reach B3-1" , “Special character reach B3-2”) to notify that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  If the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, and “E6H3FH” or “E7H3FH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B031” or “variation effect pattern B032” is determined. You. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H40H” or “E7H40H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern B033” or “variation effect pattern B034” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H41H” or “E7H41H”. Is determined, a "fluctuation effect pattern B035" or a "fluctuation effect pattern B036" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns B031” to “variation effect patterns B036”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”), and then the special character is changed. Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B4-1", "Special character reach B4-2", "Special character reach B5-1", "Special character reach B5-2", "Special character reach B6-1" , “Special character reach B6-2”), and a variation effect that informs that the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

  In the fluctuating effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, “variation effect pattern B001” to “fluctuating effect pattern B042” are executed (実 行), non-executed (特別), and “development notice B” and “fixed effect B” as special effects. X) is associated with the information.

For example, the special symbol determination result “variable effect pattern B019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice B” is executed (○) and “decided effect B” is not executed (×).
When the “variable effect pattern B019” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process described below, the sub CPU 102a confirms that “development notice B” is to be executed as a special effect in step S1311-6. I do.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42 is a variable effect of the variable effect performed after the special figure change number of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode C, a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when a special jackpot is not won even when the special figure changes 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the effect mode C as a variable effect pattern having a reach effect different from the “special character reach” in the effect mode B in the special figure change frequency of 31 to 74 times in the high probability game state and the time saving game state Has a fluctuating effect pattern of “attack reach” in which the player makes an attack.

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C in FIG. 42, when the special symbol determination result is "losing", "E6H50H" or "E7H50H" is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. , “Fluctuation effect pattern C001” or “fluctuation effect pattern C002” is determined.

  In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C001” and the “variable effect pattern C002”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol change C1-1”, “symbol change C1- 2)), a variable effect that notifies that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H51H” or “E7H51H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C003” or “variation effect pattern C004” is determined. You. In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C005” or “variation effect pattern C006” is determined. You.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns C003” to “variable effect patterns C006” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change C2-1”, “symbol change C2-2”, “symbol change C3-1”). , "Symbol variation C3-2"), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H53H” or “E7H53H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C007” or “variation effect pattern C008” is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H54H” or “E7H54H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C009” or “variation effect pattern C010” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H55H” or “ When “E7H55H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern C011” or “variable effect pattern C012” is set, and when the special figure changing pattern designating command “E6H56H” or “E7H56H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern” is determined. If “C013” or “fluctuating effect pattern C014” is determined as the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command “E6H57H” or “E7H57H”, “fluctuating effect pattern C015” or “fluctuating effect pattern C016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern specification command “E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns C007” to “variable effect patterns C018” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change C2-1”, “symbol change C2-2”, “symbol change C3-1”). , "Symbol variation C3-2"), and then attack reach ("attack reach C4-1", "attack reach C4-2", "attack reach C5-1", which is an effect of a predetermined character attacking) "Attack reach C5-2", "Attack reach C6-1", "Attack reach C6-2", "Attack reach C1-1", "Attack reach C1-2", "Attack reach C2-1", "Attack Reach C2-2 "," Attack reach C3-1 ", and" Attack reach C3-2 "), and this is a variable effect informing that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first big hit and “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C019” or “variation effect pattern C020” is determined. You. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C021” or “variation effect pattern C022” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern C023" or the "fluctuation effect pattern C024" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns C019” to “variation effect patterns C024”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation C3-1”, “symbol variation C3-2”), and then a predetermined character is displayed. Attack reach (“attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack reach C2-2”, “attack reach C3-1”, "Attack reach C3-2"), and a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, and “E6H5FH” or “E7H5FH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C031” or “variation effect pattern C032” is determined. You. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H60H” or “E7H60H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C033” or “variation effect pattern C034” becomes the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H61H” or “E7H61H”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern C035" or the "fluctuation effect pattern C036" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns C031” to “variation effect patterns C036”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”), and thereafter, a predetermined character is displayed. Attack attack ("attack reach C4-1", "attack C4-2", "attack reach C5-1", "attack reach C5-2", "attack reach C6-1", "attack reach C4-1" Attack reach C6-2 ") is performed, and the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, a variable effect similar to the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, “variation effect pattern C001” to “variation effect pattern C042” are executed (〇) or non-execution of “development notice C” and “fixed effect C” as special effects. Information indicating (x) is associated with the information.
For example, the special design determination result “fluctuating effect pattern C019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice C” and “determined effect C” are executed (（).
When the “variable effect pattern C019” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines “development notice C” and “fixed effect C” as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. 43 is a variable effect of a variable effect performed after the number of special figure changes in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is 75 to 84 times. It is a pattern.

  In this effect mode D, there is a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when a special jackpot is not won even if the special figure changes 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it appears only in the effect mode D as a variable effect pattern having a reach effect different from the “attack reach” of the effect mode C in the special figure fluctuation times of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability game state and the time reduction game state, The character performing Janken has a variable effect pattern of “Janken effect” in which the character performing Janken is the opponent of Janken for a predetermined number of times. By such a fluctuation effect of the Janken effect, the player is given an expectation that he wants to win a jackpot in a state where the number of special figure changes in the high-probability game state and the time saving game state is small.

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D in FIG. 43, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H70H” or “E7H70H” is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. In the case where any one of “variable effect pattern D001” to “variable effect pattern D003” is determined and “E6H71H” or “E7H71H” is determined, “variable effect pattern D004” to “variable effect If any one of the “pattern D006” is determined and “E6H72H” or “E7H72H” is determined, one of the “variable effect pattern D007” to the “variable effect pattern D009” is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns D001” to “variable effect pattern D009” include “design change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”, “symbol change D1-3” and “symbol change”) that variably display a plurality of special effect symbols. The two characters are notified during the “change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3” and the “symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3” by informing “Janken win once!”. This is a fluctuating production in which the (friend character, opponent character) makes a one-time jump, performs an effect that the ally character loses, and informs that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In a case where the special symbol determination result is a loss, if “E6H73H” or “E7H73H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any one of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D012” Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D013” to “variation effect pattern D015” is determined, and the special figure variation When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, one of “fluctuation effect pattern D016” to “fluctuation effect pattern D018” is decided.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D018” are variation effects in which “Janken Reach” is executed after “symbol variation” to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D010” to “variable effect patterns D012” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win twice!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3)) perform an effect in which the ally character loses in the second round of Janken, and notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It is a production.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D013” to “variable effect patterns D015” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Let's win three times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match, and the friend character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D2-1) to (Janken Reach D2-3)), the effect is that the ally character wins in the second round of janken and the ally character loses in the third round of janken, and the jackpot is determined. Is a variable effect that informs that the determination result is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D016” to “variable effect patterns D018” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Let's win four times in Janken!", And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken Reach" ( In the “Janken Reach D3-1” to “Janken Reach D3-3”), the effect is that the ally character wins in the second and third rounds of janken and the ally character loses in the fourth round of janken reach. This is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D019” to “variable effect patterns D021” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win twice!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3)), the effect that the ally character wins even in the second round of Janken is performed, and the fluctuation informing that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot is performed. It is a production.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D022” to “variable effect patterns D024” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Let's win three times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match, and the friend character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( “Janken Reach D2-1” to “Janken Reach D2-3”) perform an effect in which the ally character wins consecutively in the second and third round of Janken, and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is a fluctuating effect that informs you that there is something.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D025” to “variable effect patterns D027” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Let's win four times in Janken!", And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken Reach" ( “Janken Reach D3-1” to “Janken Reach D3-3”) will produce an effect that allies will win consecutively in the 2nd to 4th round of Janken, and the jackpot judgment result will be a jackpot It is a fluctuating effect that informs the user of the fact.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, when “E6H7CH” or “E7H7CH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern D037” to “variation effect pattern D039” If any of them is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H7DH” or “E7H7DH” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D040” to “variation effect pattern D042” is determined, and When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D037” to “variable effect patterns D039” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win twice!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3) perform the effect that the ally character and the opponent character become "Aiko" in the second round of Janken, and determine the jackpot determination. This is a variable effect informing that the result is the third big hit or the small hit.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D040” to “variable effect patterns D042” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Let's win three times!" And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match, and the friend character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( In the “Janken Reach D2-1” to “Janken Reach D2-3”), the ally character wins in the second round of Janken, and the ally character and the opponent character become “Aiko” in the third round of Janken. This is a variable effect that notifies the user that the big hit determination result is a third big hit or a small hit.

  The fluctuation effects of the “variation effect pattern D043” to the “variation effect pattern D045” are performed during “symbol fluctuation” (“symbol fluctuation D3-1” to “symbol fluctuation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "Let's win four times in Janken!", And two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken Reach" ( ("Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3"), the ally character wins consecutively in the second and third round of Janken, and the ally character and the opponent character in the fourth round of Janken. This is a variable effect in which the effect that the content is “Aiko” is performed, and the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

“Variation effect pattern D001” to “Variation effect pattern D054” are associated with information indicating execution (〇) of “development notice D”, “character notice D”, and “decided effect D” as special effects. I have.
For example, the special symbol determination result “variable effect pattern D019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice D” is executed (○) and “decided effect D” is executed (○).
If the “variable effect pattern D019” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1311-6 that the special effect includes “development notice D” and “character notice D”. It is confirmed that "decision effect D" is to be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 43, in the special game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B in which the number of times the special symbol is changed is 1 to 30 is executed. The variation effect in the effect mode C, which is executed when the number of changes is 31 to 74, is higher in the execution ratio of the special effect than in the variation effect, and the number of changes is 35 to 84 compared to the variation effect in the effect mode C. The execution effect of the special effect is higher in the variable effect of the effect mode D executed at the time.

(Type of each special production)
FIGS. 44 and 45 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode A”. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variable effect patterns in the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 44 (b) shows a special effect for each variable effect pattern in the effect mode A when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the execution ratios (%) of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A5” as “line announcement A” are set, and “character announcement A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” as “development notice A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” as “determined effect A” is set.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. FIG. 45 (a) is a diagram illustrating a “line notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram illustrating a “character notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45C is a diagram illustrating a “development notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45D is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in the effect mode A.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 45 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b). Are determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

  “Serif notice A1” is for displaying an effect image of “serif a1”, “Get a quick getaway!” On the image display device 14. In the "line notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X11 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. Is performed to prompt the user. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period, an effect image (hereinafter, “character a1” as “line a1” saying “Get rich!” 62 (a-1-4))) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3". Execute the corresponding effect.

  “Serif notice A2” is to display on the image display device 14 an effect image of “serif a2”, “Have a hundred cars?”. In the "line notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X11 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Is performed, and the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the effect that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation validity period, an effect in which a “character a1” described later says “acquire one hundred cars?” As “line a1”. A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 63) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The effect of "Serial notice A3" is the same as that of "Serial notice A2", except that the effect image of "Serif a3" of "Do you get ten cars?" Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  "Serif notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and the effect of "Serif a4" is displayed at a predetermined timing on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. The production contents are the same.

  The “serial notice A5” is the same as the “serial notice A1” except that the effect image of “serif a5” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period. The production contents are the same.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the "line notice A", the execution ratio of the "line notice A1" is the lowest in the case of a loss, and the "line notice A1" in the case of a loss in the case of a jackpot. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is highest in “Serif notice A1”, and becomes lower as “Serif notice A2” to “Serif notice A5”. , "Serial announcement A", the execution ratio of "Serial announcement A1" to "Serial announcement A5" is set.

  “Serif notice A” includes “serif notice A1” in which operation prompting for prompting operation of effect lever 19A is executed, and “serif notice A2” to “serif notice A2” in which operation prompting for prompting operation of effect button 18A is executed. Notice A5 ". Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the loss rate is considerably higher than the jackpot rate, and when this is a loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of the “line announcement A2” to “line announcement A5” is higher than the execution ratio of “line announcement A1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “serif notice” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the rate at which the operation prompting for prompting the operation of the rendering button 18A is performed depends on the operation for prompting the operation of the rendering lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variable production of the production mode A, when a big hit or the like occurs, the ratio of the “character notice A1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is high, The effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A.

  “Character notice A1” is for displaying an effect image of “character a2-1” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period Y11 described later), the operation promotion notification is executed. Not done. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period, an effect image (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 62) of “character a2-1” described later is displayed on the image display device. 14 is displayed.

  “Character notice A2” is for displaying an effect image of “character a2-2” on the image display device 14. In the "character notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period Y11 described later), the operation promotion notification is executed. However, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the effect that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 63) described later is displayed. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

  "Character notice A3" is the same as "Character a2-2" except that the effect image of "Character a2-3" (see (c-2-4) in FIG. 64) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of "Character a2-2". The effect contents are the same as the character notice A2 ".

  “Character notice A4” does not set an operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, instead of “character a2-2”, an effect image of “character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as "Character notice A2".

  “Character notice A5” does not set an operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, instead of “character a2-2”, an effect image of “character notice a2-5” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as "Character notice A2".

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in “character notice A”, the execution rate of “character notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and “character notice A1” in the case of a loss in the case of a big hit. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is highest in “character notice A1” and becomes lower as “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”. , "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" are set.

  "Character notice A" is based on "Character notice A1" for displaying an effect image of "Character a2-1" on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A, and based on a pressing operation of the effect button 18A. It is composed of "character notice A2" to "character notice A5" for displaying the effect images of "character a2-2" to "character a2-5" on the image display device 14. When the loss is higher than the jackpot or the like, the ratio of the execution of “character notice A2” to “character notice A5” in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A is determined by the effect lever. It is higher than the ratio of executing “character notice A1” in which a character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A. Therefore, in the “character notice A” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the ratio at which the effect in which the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A is performed is the effect lever. It is higher than the ratio at which the effect of displaying the character image based on the operation of 19A is executed. On the other hand, when there is a jackpot or the like, the ratio of the execution of the “character announcement A1” in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A is increased, and based on the operation of the effect button 18A. The effect in which the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect in which the character image is displayed.

  The “advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X12 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is operated. Is performed to prompt the user. Then, the effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilt operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. At the same time, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” is executed.

  "Development notice A2" is for displaying the effect image of "effect a2" on the image display device 14. In this “development notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X12 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Is performed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “effect a2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the second decorative member 17B is used as a movable member. Is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”.

  "Development notice A3" is an effect image of "effect a3" (not shown) displayed on the image display device 14 in place of "effect a1", and is produced as "advance notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  The effect of the “advance notice A4” is the same as that of the “advance notice A2” except that the effect button 18A is set in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.

  “Development notice A5” is an effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, and is produced as “advance notice A1” except that the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  In the “advance notice A6”, the effect button 18A is set in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period, and an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 in place of “effect a2”, and the movable member Is not operated, and the effect contents are the same as the “advance notice A2”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the “development notice A”, the “expansion notice A1” has the highest expectation (reliability) with respect to the jackpot of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6”. The execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” are set so as to be lower as “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.

  “Development notice A” includes “development notice A1”, “development notice A3”, “development notice A5” in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of effect lever 19A is executed, and operation promotion notice for prompting operation of effect button 18A. It is composed of “development notice A2”, “development notice A4”, and “development notice A6”. Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the loss rate is considerably higher than the jackpot rate, and when this is a loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of the “development notice A2”, “development notice A4”, and “development notice A6” indicates that the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. “Development notice A1”, “development notice A3”, “development notice A5” Is higher than the execution rate. Therefore, in the “development notice” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed depends on the operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the fluctuation effect of the effect mode A, when a big hit or the like is performed, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher, and the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher. Also, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability).

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the variable production that evolves from “super reach” to “special reach”, the production button 18A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation effective period, and “super reach” is displayed. In the variable production that does not develop from "" to "special reach", the execution ratio of "Development notice A1" to "Development notice A6" is set such that the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation valid period. ing.

  The “determination effect A1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display the effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In the “determined effect A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. During the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X22 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is operated. Is performed to prompt the user. Then, based on the operation of tilting the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash a1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the "standby position 1". Is performed to the “operation position 1-2”.

  “Determined effect A2” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display an effect image of “flash a2” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In the “determined effect A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X22 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is operated. Is performed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash a2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the “determined effect A”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect A1” and the “determined effect A2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect A2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” is set such that the effect “effect 1” is higher. In other words, the "determined effect A1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the big hit determination is a hit (first to third big hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is lost. You.

  "Determined effect A" is composed of "determined effect A1" in which an operation prompting prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and "determined effect A2" in which operation prompting prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Is done. Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the loss rate is considerably higher than the jackpot rate, and when this is a loss, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of the “determined effect A2” is higher than the execution ratio of the “determined effect A1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode A in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed depends on the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode A, when a big hit or the like occurs, the rate of execution of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is increased, and the operation of the effect button 18A is prompted. The effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

FIGS. 46 and 47 are tables which are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern in the effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 46 (b) shows a special effect for each of the variable effect patterns in the effect mode B when the determination result of the big hit determination is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the execution ratios (%) of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” as “development notice B” are set, and are set as “decision effect B”. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2” is set.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the effect mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect B information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in the effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 47 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). Are determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

  The “advance notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B1”, an operation validity period (for example, an operation validity period X41 described later) for validating the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and in the operation validity period, an operation prompt for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. This is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 66). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14. The corresponding effect such as displaying on the display is executed.

  “Development notice B2” is for displaying the effect image of “effect b2” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B2”, an operation validity period (for example, an operation validity period X41 described later) for validating the operation of the production lever 19A is set, and during the operation validity period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is issued. It is executed (see (d-2-2) of FIG. 66). Then, the effect image of “effect b2” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “development notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is “development notice B2” and “development notice B2”. The execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set to be higher than “B1”.

  The “development notice B” is composed of “development notice B1” in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice B2” in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. Then, in the effect mode B in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the loss rate is considerably higher than the jackpot rate, and if the loss occurs, the effect lever is produced. The execution ratio of “development effect B2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution ratio of “development effect B1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode B in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the effect mode B, when a big hit or the like occurs, the rate of execution of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

  The “determined effect B1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display the effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In this “determined effect B1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X52 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Is performed (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 63). Then, based on a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  “Determined effect B2” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display an effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In the “determined effect B2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is operated. Is performed (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 67). Then, based on the operation of tilting the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “determined effect B”, the degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the jackpot of “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2” is more “determined effect” than “determined effect B1”. The execution ratio of “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2” is set so that “effect B2” is higher. That is, the "determined effect B1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the big hit determination is a hit (first to third big hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. You.

  "Determined effect B" is composed of "determined effect B1" in which an operation prompting prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed and "determined effect B2" in which operation prompting prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the effect mode B that is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the execution rate of the “decision effect B2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed depends on the operation that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “determined effect B1” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode B in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, when it is a jackpot or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode B, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is increased, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is encouraged. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

FIGS. 48 and 49 are tables which are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode C”. FIG. 48A is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern in the effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows a special effect for each of the variable effect patterns of the effect mode C when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the execution ratios (%) of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” as “development notice C” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect C1” and “determined effect C2” is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode C. FIG. 49A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the effect mode C. FIG. 49B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in the effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 49 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b). Are determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

  The “advance notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) of FIG. 69) on the image display device 14. The “advance notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect c1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice C1”, an operation validity period (for example, an operation validity period X71 described later) for validating the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and during the operation validity period, an operation prompt for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. It is executed (see (g-2-1) of FIG. 69). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14. The corresponding effect such as displaying on the display is executed.

  The “expansion notice C2” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect c2” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice C2”, an operation validity period (for example, an operation validity period X71 described later) for validating the operation of the production lever 19A is set, and during the operation validity period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is issued. It is executed (see (g-2-2) of FIG. 68). Then, the effect image of “effect c2” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilt operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and (b), in “development notice C”, the degree of expectation (reliability) to the jackpot of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is “development notice C2” and “development notice C2”. The execution ratios of “advance notice C1” and “advance notice C2” are set to be higher than “C1”.

  "Development notice C" is composed of "development notice C1" in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of effect button 18A is executed, and "development notice C2" in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. Then, in the effect mode C in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the loss rate is considerably higher than the rate of the jackpot, etc. The execution ratio of “development effect C2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the 19A is executed is higher than the execution ratio of “development effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode C in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the effect mode C, when the jackpot is a big hit or the like, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is increased, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

  The “determination effect C1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In the “determined effect C1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X72 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Is performed (see (g-3-2) of FIG. 69). Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  The “determination effect C2” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display the effect image of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this “determined effect C2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. During the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is operated. Is performed (see (g-3-3) of FIG. 69). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and (b), in the “determined effect C”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect C1” and the “determined effect C2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect C1”. The execution ratio of “determined effect C1” and “determined effect C2” is set so that “effect C2” is higher. That is, the "determined effect B1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the big hit determination is a hit (first to third big hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. You.

  The "determined effect C" is composed of a "determined effect C1" in which an operation promoting notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and a "determined effect C2" in which an operation promoting notification prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. Then, in the effect mode C in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, when the game is lost, the execution ratio of the “decision effect C2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is indicated by the effect button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate of the “determined effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of “1” is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, when it is a jackpot or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is increased, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is encouraged. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

FIGS. 50 and 51 are tables which are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern in “effect mode D”. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 50 (b) shows each special effect for each of the fluctuation effect patterns of the effect mode D when the determination result of the big hit determination is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, “third big hit” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the execution ratios (%) of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” as “development notice D” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D2” is set.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. FIG. 51A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice D” in the effect mode D. FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” in the effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 51 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). Are determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

  The “development notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice D1”, an operation validity period (for example, an operation validity period X101 described later) for validating the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and in the operation validity period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is issued. Be executed. Then, based on the effect that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation validity period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The “development notice D2” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice D2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 to be described later) for validating the operation of the effect lever 19A is set, and during the operation effective period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is issued. Be executed. Then, based on the effect of tilting the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect corresponding to the effect of displaying the effect image of “effect d2” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) to the jackpot of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is “development notice D2” and “development notice D2”. The execution ratios of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” are set to be higher than “D1”.

  The “development notice D” is composed of “development notice D1” in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice D2” in which operation promotion notice for prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the effect mode D in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the loss rate is considerably higher than the rate of the jackpot and the like, and in the effect mode D, the loss rate is lost. In this case, the execution ratio of “development effect D2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher than the execution ratio of “development effect D1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. high. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the effect mode D, when a jackpot or the like whose ratio is lower than the loss is performed, the ratio at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed increases. The effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect that prompts the operation of the lever 19A.

  “Character notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of “character d1” on the image display device 14. In this "character notice D1", the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period Y101 described later), the operation promotion notification is executed. (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (j-4-3) in FIG. 71) of the later-described "character d1" is displayed. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

  "Character notice D2" is the same as "character notice D1" except that an effect image of "character d2" (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of "character d1".

  “Character notice D3” is for displaying an effect image of “character d3” on the image display device 14. In the “character notice D3”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. During the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period Y101 described later), the operation promotion notification is executed. (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the operation of tilting the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect corresponding to the content such as displaying the effect image of “character d3” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is the highest in “character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set so as to become lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3” become.

  "Character notice D" includes "character notice D1" and "character notice D2" in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of effect button 18A is executed, and "character notice" in which operation promotion notification for prompting operation of effect lever 19A is executed. D3 ". In the effect mode D that is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution rate of the “development effect D3” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is determined by the operation that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “character notice D1” and “character notice D2” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the effect mode D, when a jackpot or the like is performed, the rate of execution of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is increased, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

  The “determination effect D1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display the effect image of “flash d1” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In this “determined effect D1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X102 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Is performed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single press operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “determined effect D2” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In the “determined effect D2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. During the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X102 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is operated. Is performed to prompt the user. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position 1”. Is performed to the “operation position 1-2”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “determined effect D”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect D1” and the “determined effect D2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect D2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D2” is set such that effect “D1” is higher. In other words, the “determined effect D1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a hit (first to third large hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is lost. You.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “determined effect D”, in the case of a loss, a “big hit” or a small hit is performed so that the “determined effect D2” is executed at a higher ratio than the “determined effect D1”. In the case of, each execution ratio is set such that the “determined effect D1” is executed at a higher rate than the “determined effect D2”.

  The "determined effect D" is composed of a "determined effect D1" in which an operation promoting notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and a "determined effect D2" in which an operation promoting notification for prompting operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the effect mode D which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution rate of the “decision effect D2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is determined by the operation prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “determined effect D1” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the execution rate. On the other hand, when it is a jackpot or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is increased, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is encouraged. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect.

  Note that the “expansion notice” and the “fixed effect” in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D have different jackpot expectations. That is, among the “development notice B1” executed in the effect mode B, the “development notice C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “development notice D1” executed in the effect mode D, “development notice D1” Has the highest jackpot expectation (reliability), and as the “development notice C1” and “development notice B1” appear, the jackpot expectation decreases. In addition, among “determined effect B1” executed in effect mode B, “determined effect C1” executed in effect mode C, and “determined effect D1” executed in effect mode D, “determined effect D1” Has the highest degree of expectation (reliability), and as the “determined effect C1” and the “determined effect B1”, the jackpot expectation decreases. Therefore, in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, it can be said that the big hit expectation by the effect using the effect button 18A increases as the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D progress.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) during the operation valid period in which the operation on the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) is valid as a special effect in the figure fluctuation effect. The corresponding effect is executed based on.

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period (first period) in the specific gaming state. In the second period after the period (1), the operation valid period is set during the fluctuation effect.

  That is, the operation validity period is set at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (31st to 74th fluctuation) in the effect mode C than in the fluctuation effect in the effect mode B (1st to 30th fluctuation). In addition, the operation validity period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect in the effect mode D (the 75th to 84th fluctuation) than in the fluctuation effect in the effect mode C.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than an earlier period (first period) in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, and a later period in the specific game state ( In a second period after the first period), an operation valid period is set in which the effect button 18A as the operation means for validating the operation is set in the second state, that is, the projecting state.

  In addition, when in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the sub CPU 102a executes a special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A at a higher rate than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. . On the other hand, in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state), the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. Run with On the other hand, in the specific game state, the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variable effect pattern determination processing by the effect control board)
The variable effect pattern determination processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c, and thereby sets the current effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described below to set the current effect mode flag. The effect mode is confirmed, and the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and when confirming that the current effect mode is "effect mode A", Then, the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode B" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B shown in FIG. 41 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode C" , The variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C shown in FIG. 42 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode D" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG. 43 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode E" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown) is selected.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of variation effect patterns are stored in association with the variation effect pattern determination values for each special figure variation pattern designation command in each effect mode. The variable effect pattern is identification information indicating the effect content of the variable effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variable effect.

  The variable effect pattern is associated with the components of the variable effect such as the time of the variable effect, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In the variable effect pattern of the variable effect on the image display device 14, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the display mode of the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also included as components of the variable effect. Corresponding.

  In step S1311-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for fluctuation effect pattern determination. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for fluctuation effect pattern determination in the random number storage area for fluctuation effect pattern determination of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a compares the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area in step S1313-4 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby obtaining the variation effect pattern. Is determined.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the special effect associated with the variable effect of the variable effect pattern determined in step S1313-4 is execution (〇) or non-execution (×) (FIG. 40 to FIG. 40). By referring to FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect in the variable effect of the determined variable effect pattern. If the special effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311-6. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the special effect, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311-9.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a checks the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4, in this step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a executes “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” as special effects. Then, it is confirmed that the “determined effect A” is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of the special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the processing for determining the type of the special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process moves to step S1311-9. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, if the sub CPU 102a determines the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4, in step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a executes the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A in FIG. Any one of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" is determined as the type of "Serif notice A", and any of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is determined as the type of "Character notice A" Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining whether to execute the specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation degree using the vibration of the effect button 18A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, and determines whether or not to execute the specific effect based on the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the random value for specific effect determination. judge. In the present embodiment, a specific effect is not performed when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is a normal effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H04H”, it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed at a rate of 50% (○), and that the specific effect is not to be executed at a rate of 50% (×). When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H0CH”, it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed at a rate of 80% (○), and that the specific effect is not to be executed at a rate of 20% (×).

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not it has been determined that the specific effect is to be executed (出) in step S1311-9. When it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (○), the process proceeds to step S13111-11, and when it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed (x), the process proceeds to step S1311-12.

  In step S1311-11, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any one or a combination of the vibration of the effect button 18A, the output of the pseudo sound of the sound of the effect button 18A vibrating, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A vibrating. The effect button 18A is subjected to one of two types of vibration, low-speed vibration and high-speed vibration.

  The specific effect type determination processing will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1311-11-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  More specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination tables shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, and sets the vibration speed to “low speed” using the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the random value for vibration speed determination. "Or" high speed ". As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the effect button 18A can be vibrated. The “high speed” is a vibration speed at which the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating and the vibration is transmitted to the player as “poco poco poco poco”. On the other hand, “low speed” means, as described above, that when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating, “Poko... The vibration speed.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, “high speed” is determined at a rate of 50%, and “low speed” is determined at a rate of 50%. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is "E7H5BH", "high speed" is determined at a rate of 90%, and "low speed" is determined at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a big hit, the rate at which the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be “high” than “low” is higher than in the case of a loss. Also, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is an effect with a higher jackpot expectation, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be “higher” than “low”. Are increasing. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the effect of the big hit expectation is higher when the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is “high” than when the vibration speed is “low”. If "high speed" is determined in this step, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed during execution of the specific effect, and if "low speed" is determined, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a low speed during execution of the specific effect. .

  In step S1311-11-2, the sub CPU 102a executes a sound output determination process for determining whether to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect sound output determination tables shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, and uses the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the random number value for sound output determination to determine the presence or absence of sound output. decide. The output of the sound means that the sound output device 15 outputs a sound such as “pocopocopocopoco” or “poco... Poco” which is the vibration sound of the effect button 18A during execution of the specific effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is determined that the voice output is performed at a rate of 50% (％), and the voice output is not performed at a rate of 50% (×). I do. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is determined that voice output is performed at a rate of 90% (（), and that voice output is not performed at a rate of 10% (×). I do. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a big hit, the ratio of performing the sound output (○) is higher than in the case of the loss. Also, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is an effect with a higher jackpot expectation, the ratio of executing sound output (○) is higher. Therefore, when performing a specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is an effect with a higher jackpot expectation than the effect of not outputting the sound.

  In step S1311-11-3, the sub CPU 102a performs an image output determination process for determining whether to output data of a simulated image of the effect button 18A that vibrates in the specific effect.

  More specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination tables shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, and determines the presence / absence of image output using the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the random number for image output determination. I do. Outputting an image means displaying an image simulating a state in which the effect button 18A is vibrating during execution of the specific effect on the image display device 14.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is determined that image output is performed at a rate of 50% (％), and image output is not performed at a rate of 50% (×). I do. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is determined that image output is to be performed at a rate of 90% (し), and that image output is not to be performed at a rate of 10% (×). I do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the image output (○) is higher than in the case of the loss. In addition, the higher the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is the effect with the higher jackpot expectation, the higher the ratio of executing image output (○). Therefore, when executing the specific effect, the effect of outputting the pseudo image of the vibrating effect button 18A is an effect having a higher jackpot expectation than the effect of not outputting the image.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode in the specific effect by executing the processing of steps S1311-11-1 to S13111-11-3. The display of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the simulation sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the image of the vibrating effect button 18A are each determined according to the jackpot expectation degree. That is, in the specific effect, whether the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” or “low speed”, whether the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the audio output device 15, or the effect is displayed on the image display device 14. Whether the image representing the button 18A is displayed indicates the jackpot expectation degree. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A gradually increases the jackpot expectation degree. It is different.

  Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect shown in FIG. 60, the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” in the specific effect, and a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output. When the image of the effect button 18A is displayed, the effect indicates the highest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, when the effect button 18A only vibrates at “low speed” and the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A or the image of the effect button 18A is not output, the specific effect with the lowest jackpot expectation degree is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, as shown in the specific effect type determination process in FIG. 36, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and Although the presence or absence of the image output of the vibrating effect button 18A is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, a combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of the image output of the vibrating effect button 18A is set in advance. The combination of the specific effects may be determined according to the jackpot expectation degree. Also, a combination of specific effects may be set in association with each variable effect pattern.

  When the specific effect type determination processing ends, the sub CPU 102a moves the processing to step S1311-12.

  In step S1311-12, the sub CPU 102a adds the special effect information of the type determined in step S1311-7 to the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, and determines in step S13111-11. And the information on the type of the specific effect, and sets the variable effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-13, the sub CPU 102a stores the variable effect data corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variable effect in the variable effect timer counter. . The variable effect timer counter is subjected to “4” addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variable effect at the present time by using the variable effect timer counter.

  Note that the fluctuation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the variable effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern indicated by the command, and outputs the sound of the variable effect to the audio output device. 15 is performed. Further, when receiving the variable effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 17 and the illumination control of the effect lighting device 16 in the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern indicated by the command.

  Further, the image control board 105 displays the effect image of the special effect on the image display device 14 at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern indicated by the variable effect control command received from the effect control board 102. The control and the control for outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variable effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 17 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 16 in the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting processing by the production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect symbol designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. . The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1314-3 when confirming that there is a loss, and moves to step S1314-7 when confirming that there is no loss.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information of the special effect symbol designating command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b and determines the effect mode by comparing the confirmed result of the special symbol determination with the effect mode determination table.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in this step S1314-1 is the first big hit or the second big hit, as shown in FIG. 39, the "effect mode B" is determined. As a result, after the end of the first big hit game or the end of the second big hit game, the “effect mode B” is set.
When the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 39, the "effect mode E" is determined. As a result, after the end of the third big hit game or the end of the small hit game, the “effect mode E” is set.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the effect mode executable number of times associated with the effect mode (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The effect mode executable number of times refers to the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of variable effects (M: effect mode remaining number) that can be executed in the specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When the "effect mode B" is determined in step S1314-7, "effect mode B" is set after the end of the first big hit game or after the end of the second big hit game, and the effect mode executable number ( 30 times are stored as Ma).
Also, when the “effect mode E” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third big hit game or the end of the small hit game, and the effect mode executable number of times is set. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current mode is the effect mode A, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization processing of step S10 in the main processing of the main control board, the sub CPU 102a sets the production mode flag “00H” to the production mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  In step S1314-3, when determining that the mode is the effect mode A, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the mode is not the effect mode A, in step S1314-4, the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is subtracted by "1" to update the remaining number (M) of the effect mode, and step S1314. At -5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is "0".

  In this step S1314-5, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the effect number of remaining times (M) is not "0", the effect mode setting processing ends, and the counter value becomes " If it is determined to be "0", in step S1314-6, the effect mode flag of the "destination effect mode" shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of the effect device mode), and the effect mode setting is performed. The process ends.

  For example, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode B in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and in step S1314-5, M = 0. If it is determined that there is any (YES in S1314-5), in step S1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode after the effect mode B (transition destination effect mode).

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 in the state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode C (YES in S1314-5), in step S1314-6, the effect mode C is set. An effect mode D is set as a subsequent effect mode (migration destination effect mode).

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 while the effect mode D is set (YES in step S1345-5), in step S1314-6, the effect mode D is determined. An effect mode A is set as a subsequent effect mode (migration destination effect mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 39, the effect mode A is set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state.
In addition, in the high-probability game state and the time reduction game state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, if the number of special figure changes is 1 to 30 times The effect mode B is set, and if the number of special figure changes is 31 to 74, the effect mode C is set. If the number of special figure changes is 75 to 84, the effect mode D is set.
If the number of special figure changes after the third big hit game or the small hit game when the third big hit or the small hit is won is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines a variable effect pattern based on the variable effect pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode set as described above.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the special effects (“serif notice”, “character notice”, “development notice”, “fixed effect”) among the variable effect patterns shown in the variable effect pattern determination tables of FIGS. A variable effect pattern associated with the presence / absence of execution of a specific effect based on the information of (〇) and the specific effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 is determined, and a special effect associated with the determined variable effect pattern is determined. As the type of the effect, the specific effect is referred by referring to the special effect type associated with the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 51, and the specific effect type determination tables in FIGS. 54 to 59. When the type is determined, the operation effective period is set in the fluctuation effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratios (percents of circles) of the special effects in FIGS. 40 to 43 and FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a sets the “producing mode” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. "A" is performed in the "producing mode B" to the "producing mode D" in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a rate higher than the rate at which the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period to be executed is determined The special effect type associated with the operation validity period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “producing mode” in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a higher rate than the rate of the operation valid period in the variable production in the “producing mode A” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. In the variable effects of "B" to "effect mode D", the operation effective period is set.

  Then, as can be seen from the execution ratios of the special effects (the ratios of circles) in FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a executes the second big hit game after the end of the first big hit game. Of the “producing mode B” to the “producing mode D” of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state set in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the end of “producing mode B” and “producing mode C” , The type of special effect that is associated with the operation validity period is determined as the type of special effect to be executed in that mode at a higher rate as the mode becomes “effect mode D”. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode in which the number of special figure fluctuations is higher at a higher rate than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller among the “effect mode B” to “effect mode D”. In the (second period), the operation valid period is set during the fluctuation effect. Here, among the “production mode B” to “production mode D”, the higher the ratio becomes “production mode B”, “production mode C”, and “production mode D”, the higher the ratio of the special production executed in that mode. As the type, the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (the second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode in which the number of special figure fluctuations is higher at a higher rate than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller among the “effect mode B” to “effect mode D”. In the (second period), an operation effective period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (second state) during the fluctuation effect is set.

(Production input control processing by the production control board)
The effect input control processing by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a generates an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A, and an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A. By determining whether or not any of these operation means has been input, it is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated.

  In this step S1401, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1402 when it is determined that an operation has been performed on any of the operation means, and when it is determined that no operation has been performed on any of the operation means, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being changed and displayed, and if it is determined that the special symbol is being changed, the process proceeds to step S1403 to change the special symbol. When it is determined that the display is not being performed, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed according to the current variation display of the special symbol stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid during the variable effect according to the variable effect pattern confirmed in step S1403, and if it is determined that the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S1405. Then, when it is determined that the operation is not in the validity period, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a refers to FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, and FIG. 51 during the operation valid period determined in step S1404, and directs the operating means activated in this operation valid period. It is confirmed whether the button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Then, whether or not the activated operation means is operated is determined by the presence or absence of the input of the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. Judge based on.

That is, when the operation means activated during the operation effective period is the effect button 18A, it is determined whether or not an effect button operation detection signal is input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a, and the effect is activated during the operation effective period. If the operating means is the effect lever 19A, it is determined whether or not an effect lever operation detection signal is input from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a.
In this step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the detection signal of the activated operating means from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a during the operation valid period in step S1405, so that the operation is performed. If it is determined that the designation operation has been performed on the activated operation unit, the process proceeds to step S1406, and the detection signal of the activated operation unit is output from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. When it is determined that no designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation validity period, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1406, during the operation valid period, the sub CPU 102a sets a corresponding effect control command for controlling a corresponding effect based on a designation operation to the operation means whose operation is enabled in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when receiving the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform an effect control for executing a corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, in step S1403, when the sub CPU 102a confirms “variable effect pattern A034” as the variable effect pattern and executes “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a transmits the corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and The signal is transmitted to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display an effect image of “line a1” as the corresponding effect. In addition, the lamp control board 104 controls the drive to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation of moving to the position 3 ”is performed.

  In the present embodiment, during the execution of the game effect relating to the game using the game ball, such as the variable effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol, the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A is performed. In the operation valid state, the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation effect will be described.
(Specific example of the fluctuating production in production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 61A shows the time of the variable effect in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variable pattern designating command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variable effect pattern A034”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for explaining a general flow. FIG. 61B shows a case where the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A038”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuating effect to be performed. FIG. 61 (c) shows a variation effect in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A042”, and executes a specific effect. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a time flow of the operation.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A034 (first big hit))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, when the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “fluctuating effect pattern A034” is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts the timing T11 shown in FIG. An effect control for executing a variable effect up to timing T14 is performed. FIG. 62 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 51A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in a period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and “normal reach A1-1” in a period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. After that, in the period (a-3) and the period (a-4) from the timing T13 to the timing T14, an effect control for executing the “super reach A1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for displaying an effect image in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14 in “symbol change A1-1” in the period (a-1).

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first determines that a plurality of special effect symbols fluctuate and a predetermined character “character a1 (Kunoichi)” appears in FIG. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-1) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”. "Serif notice A" is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Serial announcement A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “Serial announcement A” in “Variable production pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the operation of the effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 61 (a) when executing any of the "line announcement A1" to the "line announcement A3" in the "symbol variation A1-1". An operation valid period X11 to be validated is set (see FIG. 45A).

  The sub CPU 102a, in the operation validity period X11, in the case of "line notice A2" or "line notice A3", includes an image of operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A (a-1-2) in FIG. The effect of displaying the effect image shown in FIG. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. Further, in the case of “line notice A1”, an effect of displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 62 including the image of the operation promotion notification urging the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 is executed. I do. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "Draw the lever!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “line announcement A1” as shown in the execution ratio of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A3” in the “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special stage classification determination table of FIG. -During the operation effective period X11 of the "line notice A3", the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state (first state) and is not set to the projecting state (second state). Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect promotion notification effect image is displayed.

  When executing the “line notice A1”, the sub-CPU 102a sets “character a1” to “line a1” (“character a1”) based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X11. The effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 62 showing the appearance of "Getting rich!" Is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is set as the movable member in the "standby position 3". The corresponding effect (preliminary effect) is executed such that the user moves to the “operation position 3”. Note that the sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the sound of “line a1” from the sound output device 15.

  When executing the “line notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a performs a process based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X11 as shown in FIG. Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 62, the effect image in which “character a1” speaks “line a2” (“acquire one hundred cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. An effect control for executing an effect (notification effect) is performed.

  When executing the “line notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a performs a process based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X11 as shown in FIG. Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of No. 62, the corresponding effect (“Character a1”) displays on the image display device 14 an effect image that speaks “Serif a3” (“Do you get ten cars?”). An effect control for executing the notice effect) is performed.

  On the other hand, when executing “line notice A4” and “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period X11. In other words, in the "line announcement A4" and the "line announcement A5", the image of the operation promotion notification such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. a1 ”performs an announcement effect of displaying an effect image of a state in which words are spoken on the image display device 14. Note that the announcement effects of the “line announcement A4” and the “line announcement A5” are the stages corresponding to the above-described corresponding stages.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 62 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Perform an announcement control (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image in which the user speaks “line a4” (“acquire one or two?”) On the image display device 14.

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a performs “character a1” at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. Perform an announcement effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14, in which the effect image speaks "line a5" ("acquire money?").

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) of FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1”. "Character notice A" is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, similarly to "line notice A".

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement A” as the “character announcement A” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement A” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any one of the character announcement A5 is performed.

  When executing any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 61 (a). Is set (see FIG. 45B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y11. That is, in the operation valid period Y11, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display the effect images shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) of FIG. Perform control.

  As shown in the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. During the operation effective period Y11 of the “character notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state (first state), and is not set to the projecting state.

  When executing the “character notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilt operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period Y11 as shown in (a-2-4) of FIG. In the image display device 14, an effect for executing a corresponding effect (notification effect) such that a new character "character a2-1" is additionally displayed in addition to the already displayed "character a1". Perform control.

  When executing the “character notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on one press of the effect button 18A during the operation effective period Y11 as shown in FIG. 45 (b). The device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (preliminary effect) such as additionally displaying “character a2-2” different from “character a2-1”.

  When executing the “character notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period Y11 as shown in FIG. 45 (b). The device 14 performs an effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as additionally displaying “character a2-3” different from “character a2-1” and “character a2-2”.

  On the other hand, when executing the “character notice A4” and the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period Y11. That is, in the “character announcement A4” and the “character announcement A5”, the image of the operation promotion notification as shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) of FIG. At the timing, an effect control for executing a notice effect in which a new character is additionally displayed is performed. The announcement effects of “character announcement A4” and “character announcement A5” are effects corresponding to the above-described corresponding effects.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45B. An effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45B. An effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (a-3) of the “super reach A1-1” and the “character a3 (child A)” is displayed. An effect control for executing an effect of displaying the effect image of the appearing reach effect on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in this period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and “character a3 (child A)”. Is performed on the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in the “super reach A1-1”. During the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-11-1. When executing a specific effect, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but is not limited thereto. For example, in the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4). Alternatively, the specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a, in the “super reach A1-1”, promotes the development of “special reach A1-1”, which is a production with a higher degree of reliability for the jackpot than the “super reach A1-1”, as a special production. “Development notice A” is executed. "Development notice A", like "Serif notice A" and "Character notice A", is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A” as “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice A6” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the operation effective period X12 in which the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is valid in any of the “advance notice A1” to the “advance notice A6” in the “super reach A1-1”. Is set (see FIG. 45 (c)).

  The sub CPU 102a, during the operation validity period X12, includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 62 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). ), The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Press the button!" Together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, or the character "Draw the lever!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of

  However, the effect image of (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period X12, and is used to display an operation prompt for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state. Contains images.

  On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A in the operation effective period X12.

  When executing the “advance notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilt operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12, as shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. Next, an effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 17B as a movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” and for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B on the image display device 14 is provided. Is performed to perform a corresponding effect (e.g., advance notice).

  When executing the “advance notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a is configured to perform a single pressing operation on the protruding effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Then, the second decoration member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”, and an effect image (effect a2) for highlighting the second decoration member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. An effect control for executing such a corresponding effect (development notice) is performed.

  When executing the “advance notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a performs the image display device 14 based on the tilt operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. Performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

  When executing the “advance notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a performs a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period X12, as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Based on this, the second decoration member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”, and the image display device 14 displays an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B. An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as.

  When executing the “advance notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a performs the image display device 14 based on the tilt operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. Performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2).

  When executing the “advance notice A6”, the sub CPU 102a performs a single pressing operation on the non-projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12, as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Based on this, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

In the period (a-4) of “Super Reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. By setting the same numerical value, control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image shown in (a-4) of FIG. 62 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A022 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-hours-saving gaming state, and “variation effect pattern A022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing shown in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern A034” is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1) from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and executes the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2) from the timing T12 to the timing T13. Is performed, and an effect control for executing an effect during a period (a-3) of “super reach A1-1” from timing T13 is performed.

  However, in the variable effect of “variable effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops during the period (a-4) without the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol. An effect control for displaying the effect image of (A-1) in FIG. 62 is performed. This notifies the player that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A038 (first big hit))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot” and “fluctuating effect pattern A038” is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts the timing T21 shown in FIG. An effect control for executing a variable effect up to timing T24 is performed.

  FIG. 63 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 61B, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a first decorative member 17A, and a second decorative member 17B.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern A038”, and executes the period (b) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, and thereafter, "special reach A1-1" is executed in the period (b-3) and the period (b-4) from the timing T23 to the timing T24. Effect control.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) in the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (b-1), The effect image of (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image of a-1-2) or the effect image of (b-1-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-3) is displayed. .

  The effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 63 shows the image of the corresponding effect in “line notice A2”. When executing the “line notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a sets “character a1” to “line a2” (“character a2”) based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X11. An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) in FIG. 54 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. 62 in the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2). After that, the effect image of (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-2) or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-3) is displayed. I do.

  The effect image shown in (b-2-4) of FIG. 63 is an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A2”. When executing the “character notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-2” based on a single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period Y21 (b) A corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of -2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a firstly displays “Character b1 (Samurai) together with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) on the image display device 14. )) Perform an effect control to display an effect image ((b-3-1) in FIG. 63) of a reach effect for capturing “character c1 (thief)”.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. During the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-11-1. When executing a specific effect, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid as shown in FIG. 61 (b) when executing the "determined effect A1" in the "special reach A1-1". (See FIG. 45D).

  In the operation valid period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays on the image display device 14 the effect image shown in (b-3-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. Perform the effect to make it. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-3), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters of "draw!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

When executing the “determined effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilt operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X22, as illustrated in FIG. 63 (b-3-4). Then, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. And the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  On the other hand, when executing the “determined effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled, as illustrated in FIG. 61B (see FIG. 45D). .

  In the operation valid period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays on the image display device 14 an effect image shown in (b-3-2) including an image of operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. Perform the effect to make it. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters of “press!” Together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state.

  Note that the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 does not need to indicate the state of the effect button 18A during the operation valid period. For example, when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state (second state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate a non-protruding state (first state), When the effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate the projecting state (second state).

  In the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in the “determined effect”. ).

Further, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect”. Only move them.
As described above, in the “determined effect” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned lower than the “operation position 1-1”. By moving to the “operation position 1-2”, the jackpot determination result is a 16R (round) first jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the 4R (round) second jackpot game It informs that the game has been won for the "first big hit".

In the period (b-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and (b-4) in FIG. 63 in which “character b1” is capturing “character c1”. An effect control for displaying the effect image shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variation effect according to variation effect pattern A026 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and “variation effect pattern A026” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing shown in FIG. A fluctuation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A038” is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22, and executes the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. Is performed, and an effect control for executing an effect during a period (b-3) of “special reach A1-1” from timing T23 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect A” as “determined effect A” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect A” in “variable effect pattern A026” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “determined effect A2” is performed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern A026”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether “specified effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “special reach A1-1” is executed. From the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character c1" from the "character b1". By displaying the effect image of (B-1) of No. 63, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A042 (first big hit))
In the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, when the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “fluctuating effect pattern A042” is selected, the sub CPU 102a returns from the timing T31 shown in FIG. An effect control for executing a variable effect up to timing T35 is performed. FIG. 61 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 61 (c), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern A042”, and executes the period (c) from the timing T32 to the timing T33. In -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, and thereafter, "super reach A1-1" is executed in a period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and a period from timing T34 to timing T35 is executed. (C-4), the effect control is performed so as to execute “special reach A1-1” in the period (c-5).

  The sub CPU 102a performs the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), and the sub CPU 102a performs the (c-1-1) of FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) of FIG. Is performed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Serial announcement A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “Serif announcement A” in “Variable production pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the effect button 18A or the effect lever as shown in FIG. 61 (c) when executing any of the "line announcement A1" to the "line announcement A3" in the "symbol variation A1-1". An operation valid period X31 for validating the operation of 19A is set (see FIG. 45A).

  During the operation valid period X31, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) in FIG. 64 including the image of the operation promotion notification on the image display device 14. I do.

  The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 64 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “line notice A3”. When executing the “line notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a changes the “character a1” to “line a3” (“character a3”) based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X31. A corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub-CPU 102a first displays the effect image of (c-2-1) in FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement A” as the “character announcement A” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement A” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the character announcements A5 is executed.

  When executing any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 61 (c). (See FIG. 45B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A during the operation effective period Y31. That is, during the operation valid period Y31, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) of FIG. Perform the production to do.

  The effect image shown in (c-2-4) of FIG. 64 is an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A3”. When executing the “character notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-3” based on a single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period Y31 ( A corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub-CPU 102a performs an effect control for executing “development notice A” that promotes development to “special reach A1-1” in “super reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice A6” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X32 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid in any of the "advance notice A1" to the "advance notice A6" in the "super reach A1-1" ( FIG. 45 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X32 (c-3-2) or an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. The effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image of (c-3-3) including the image of (c-3-3) is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. In addition, the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters "Draw the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  (C-3-4) in FIG. 64 illustrates an example of the “advance notice A1”. When executing the “advance notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilt operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X32, as shown in (c-3-4) of FIG. Next, an effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 17B as a movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” and for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B on the image display device 14 is provided. Is performed to perform a corresponding effect (e.g., advance notice).

  In the period (c-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a firstly displays “Character b1 (Samurai) with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) on the image display device 14. )) Performs an effect control for displaying an effect image ((c-4-1) in FIG. 64) of the reach effect for capturing the "character c1 (thief)".

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72A is changed to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X33 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when executing the "fixed effect A" in the "special reach A1-1". (See FIG. 45D).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect image shown in (c-4-2) or the operation of the effect lever 19A, including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the user is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification includes the effect button 18A and the image of the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the image composed of the characters "press!" Draw! "(C-4-2).

When executing the “determined effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a tilt operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X33, as illustrated in (c-4-4) of FIG. Then, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. And the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  Further, when the “determined effect A2” is executed, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period X33, as shown in FIG. 64 (c-4-4). As shown, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to the “operation position 1- 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. 2), and at the image display device 14, an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).

  In the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in the “determined effect”. ).

Further, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect”. Only move them.
As described above, in the “determined effect” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned lower than the “operation position 1-1”. By moving to the “operation position 1-2”, the jackpot determination result is a 16R (round) first jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the 4R (round) second jackpot game It informs that the game has been won for the "first big hit".

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and (c-5) in FIG. 64 in which “character b1” is capturing “character c1”. An effect control for displaying the effect image shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A030 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state and “variation effect pattern A030” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs “ A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern A042” is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32, and executes “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2) from the timing T32 to the timing T33. To perform the “super reach A1-1” from timing T33 to the timing T34, and to perform the effect of the period (c-4) of “special reach A1-1” from the timing T34. I do.

The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect A” as “determined effect A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect A” in “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “determined effect A2” is performed.
However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to the other in any case of executing the “determined effect A1” or the “determined effect A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol out of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character c1" from the "character b1". An effect control for displaying an effect image of 64 (C-1) is performed. This notifies the player that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Specific examples of the fluctuating production in production mode B)
Next, a description will be given of a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to 30th changes in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 65 (a) shows the time flow of the variable effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variable pattern designating command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variable effect pattern B019”. FIG. FIG. 65 (b) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for explaining a flow. FIG. 65 (c) shows the timing of the fluctuation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for explaining a flow.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B019 (first big hit))
In the case where the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern B019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ), Effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T401 to timing T403 is performed.

  FIG. 66 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 65 (a), and an effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and executes the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403 and In period (d-4), effect control for executing “special character reach B1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of the "symbol change B3-1".

  In the period (d-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first displays on the image display device 14 the effect image (d-1) of FIG. 66 in which a plurality of special effect symbols fluctuate. Control.

  Then, in the period (d-2) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. 66, the reach images (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and the effect images (d-2-3) of FIG. 66 are displayed. An effect control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for executing a “development notice B” that promotes the development to “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect in the “symbol variation B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B” as “development notice B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variable effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice B2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, in the "symbol variation B3-1" regardless of whether the "advance notice B1" or the "advance notice B2" is executed. An operation valid period X41 is set. The operation effective period X41 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Is set during the execution of.

  In the operation validity period X41, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation image (d-2-1) including an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. An effect of displaying an effect image (d-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “development notice B1” is composed of the characters “press the button!” (D-2-1) together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and is the image of “development notice B2”. The image of the operation promotion notification is an image of the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge, and is composed of the characters “Draw the lever!” (D-2-2).

  The effect image of (d-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is set in the protruding state during the operation effective period X41 of the “advance notice B2”, and the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the user is included.

  When the “advance notice B1” is executed, the sub CPU 102a performs a special staging design of the reach-promoting staging based on a single pressing operation performed on the staging effect button 18A during the operation effective period X41. To display a rendering image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 14 in order to execute a corresponding rendering (advance notice). Perform control.

  When executing the “advance notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a superimposes an effect image (overlaying on the special effect design of the reach-inducing effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X41). An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having the effect b2 (orange) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  (D-2-3) in FIG. 66 illustrates an example of the “advance notice B1”. When executing the “advance notice B1”, the sub-CPU 102a performs the operation shown in (d-2) in FIG. 66 based on the fact that one pressing operation is performed on the effect button 18A in the protruding state during the operation effective period X41. As shown in -3), a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect b1) on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-producing effect is executed.

  In addition, in the “advance notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a sets a reach different from (d-2-3) in FIG. 70 based on the fact that the tilt lever 19A is tilted during the operation effective period X41. An effect control for executing a development notice (corresponding effect) such as displaying an effect image (effect b2) superimposed on a special effect symbol of a fanning effect is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (d-3) of the "special character reach B1-1" and the special character "character s1 (warrior)". 66, the effect images of (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) of FIG. The effect control to be displayed is performed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B1-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72A is changed to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

Then, in the period (d-4) of the “special character reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. (D-4) in FIG. 66 in which "character s1" has defeated "character p1" while the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they have the same numerical value. ) Is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in FIG.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern B013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and “variation effect pattern B013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern B019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and executes the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. ) And period (d-4), “special character reach B1-1” is executed. When the specific effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed during the execution of “special character reach B1-1”.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B019”, the sub CPU 102a determines that the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the “special character reach B1-1”. At the same time, and an effect control for displaying an effect image (D-1) in which "character s1" is defeated by "character p1" is performed. This notifies the player that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B021 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the first to 30th changes in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern B021” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a ) Is performed to execute a variable effect from timing T501 to timing T503.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern B021”. In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) up to the timing T503, effect control for executing "special character reach B2-1" is performed.

  In the period (e-1) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14.

  In the period (e-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. 67 in which a plurality of special effect symbols fluctuate. Effect control.

  Then, in the period (e-2) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a determines that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now is the same as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier. In FIG. 67, the effect images of (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) are displayed as images indicating whether or not a reach state occurs. An effect control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls the “symbol variation B3-1” so as to execute “development notice B” for promoting the development to “special character reach B2-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B” as “development notice B” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice B” in “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. The control is performed so as to execute any of the “expansion notice B2”.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, in the "symbol variation B3-1" regardless of whether the "advance notice B1" or the "advance notice B2" is executed. An operation valid period X51 is set. The operation validity period X51 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Is set during the execution of.

  In the operation validity period X51, as shown in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect image (e-2-1) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect of displaying an effect image of the effect image (e-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of the “advance notice B1” is composed of the characters “press the button!” Together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge (e-2-1). The image of the operation promotion notification is an image (e-2-2) including the characters of “draw the lever!” Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  However, the effect image of (e-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state in the operation effective period X51 of the “advance notice B1”, and the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the user is included.

  (E-2-3) in FIG. 67 illustrates an example of the “advance notice B1”. When executing the “advance notice B1”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the protruding effect button 18A during the operation effective period X51 based on (e-2) in FIG. As shown in -3), control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such that an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect.

  In addition, in the “development notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a determines, as shown in (e-2-3) of FIG. 67, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X51. , The effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect, and control is performed so as to execute the corresponding effect (development notice).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (e-3) of the "special character reach B2-1", and the special character "character s2 (warrior)". Performs an effect control for displaying an effect image such as (e-3-1) of FIG. 67 on the image display device 14 in which the character fights with the special character “character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B2-1”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72A is changed to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a controls the “special character reach B2-1” to execute the “fixed effect B”. The sub CPU 102a controls the “special character reach B2-1” to execute “fixed effect B” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in the “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed so as to execute any one of “fixed effect B2”.

  (E-3-2) of FIG. 67 illustrates an example of “decided effect B1”. When executing the “determined effect B1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X52 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operating means is enabled in “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation valid period X52, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-2) in FIG. 67) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state.

  The sub CPU 102a, as shown in (e-3-4) of FIG. 67, based on the fact that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X52 in the "fixed effect B1". At the same time, the effect image of "flash b1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" via the "operation position 1-1" on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “determined effect” (corresponding effect) is executed, such as moving to the “operation position 1-2”, which is the lower position.

  (E-3-3) in FIG. 67 illustrates an example of the “determined effect B2”. When executing the “determined effect B2”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X52 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the operating means, is enabled in “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation valid period X52, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-3) in FIG. 67) including an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation on the effect lever 19A.

  The sub CPU 102a displays an effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 based on the tilt operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X52 in the “determined effect B2”. Moving the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to the “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14; Execute the "determined effect" (corresponding effect) of the content.

In the period (e-4) of the "special character reach B2-1", the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. In FIG. 67, (e-4) in which "Character s2" defeats "Character p2" while the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where the same numerical value is obtained. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

  In the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “determined effect B”. Position).

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “fixed effect B”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determination effect B” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the jackpot determination result indicates that the first jackpot of 16R (round) is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It informs that the player has won the "first jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

Then, in the period (e-3) of the “special character reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. (E-4) of FIG. 67 in which "Character s2" defeats "Character p2" while the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they have the same numerical value. ) Is controlled on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern B015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state and “variation effect pattern B015” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern B021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502, and executes the period (e-3) from the timing T502 to the timing T503. ) And during period (e-4), effect control is performed to execute “special character reach B2-1”. When the specific effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed during the execution of “special character reach B2-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect B” in “variable effect pattern B015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. The control for executing any one of the “determined effect B2” is performed.

  However, in the variable effect of “variable effect pattern B015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member regardless of whether “special effect B1” or “determined effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1” is executed. 17A is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character s2" by the "character p2". The effect control for displaying the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. 67 is performed. This notifies the player that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B023 (first big hit))
In the case where the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern B023” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a ) Is performed to execute a variable effect from timing T601 to timing T603.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern B023”. In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) up to the timing T603, the effect control is performed so as to execute the "special character reach B3-1".

  In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B023”, the effect content of the “symbol change B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 is “variable effect pattern B019”. This is the same as the effect content of “Symbol variation B3-1”.

  In the sub CPU 102a, the operation valid period X61 illustrated in FIG. 65C corresponds to the operation valid period X41 illustrated in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (f-3) of the "special character reach B3-1", and also displays the special character "character s3 (warrior)". (Not shown) performs an effect control so that an effect image of a content of fighting a special character “character p3 (enemy warrior)” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute “fixed effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in the “variable effect pattern B023” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect B2” is executed. Note that the sub CPU 102a sets the operation validity period X62 as shown in FIG. 65 (c) for “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2”. Further, the specific effect execution period W61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

In the period (f-4) of the “special character reach B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value as above, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image notifying that “character s3” has defeated “character p3” is displayed on the image display device 14. Is displayed.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variation effect according to variation effect pattern B017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern B017” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the “variation The effect control is performed so as to execute the same variable effect as the effect pattern B023. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602, and executes the period (f-3) from the timing T602 to the timing T603. ) And period (f-4), effect control is performed to execute “special character reach B3-1”. When executing the special effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W61 when the “special character reach B3-1” is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W61, the state of FIG. 72A is changed to the state of FIG. 72B in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in “variable effect pattern B017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect B2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B017”, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member regardless of whether the “special effect B1” or the “special effect B2” of the “special character reach B3-1” is executed. 17A is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character s3" by the "character p3". By displaying an effect image (not shown), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Specific example of the fluctuating production in production mode C)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode C set in the 31st to 74th changes in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state.
FIG. 68 (a) shows the temporal flow of the fluctuation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C019”. FIG. FIG. 68 (b) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for explaining a flow. FIG. 68 (c) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for explaining a flow.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C019 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” at the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “change effect pattern C019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. ) Is performed to execute a variable effect from timing T701 to timing T703.

  FIG. 69 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 68 (a), an effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and executes the period (g-3) from the timing T702 to the timing T703 and In the period (g-4), “attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (g-1) of the "symbol change C3-1".

  In the period (g-1) of the "symbol change C3-1", the sub CPU 102a first displays the effect image (g-1) of FIG. Execute

  Then, in the period (g-2) of the "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a sets the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from being the same as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier. In FIG. 69, the effect images of (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3), which indicate whether or not a stop state occurs and a reach state occurs, are displayed. Control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a “development notice C” as a special effect in the “symbol variation C3-1”, which fuels the development to the “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice C1”, “development notice C” as “development notice C” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any of the "expansion notice C2" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the operation effective period X71 for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the operation means, in the "symbol variation C3-1" regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice C1" or the "advance notice C2". Set. The operation validity period X71 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not a special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Is set during the execution of.

  In the operation validity period X71, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect image (g-2-1) including an image of operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the effect button 18A or an operation for prompting operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect of displaying an effect image of the effect image (g-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “development notice B1” is composed of the characters “press the button!” Together with the effect button 18A and the image of the timer gauge (g-2-1). The image of the operation promotion notification is an image of the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge, and is composed of the characters "Draw the lever!" (G-2-2).

  When executing the “advance notice C1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a special staging design of the reach-promotion effect based on a single pressing operation performed on the staging effect button 18A during the operation effective period X71. (G-2-3 in FIG. 69) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “expansion notice C2”, the sub CPU 102a superimposes the effect image (overlaying on the special effect design of the reach-pumping effect) based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X71. A corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having the effect c2 (red) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (g-3) of the “attack reach C1-1” and the character “character b1 (samurai)” is displayed. Control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG. 69, such as running and attacking an enemy. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 during the execution of the “attack reach C1-1”. Then, in the specific effect execution period W71, the state of FIG. 72A is changed to the state of FIG. 72B in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  (G-3-2) and (g-3-4) of FIG. 69 show examples of the “determined effect C1”. When executing the “determined effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X72 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operating means is enabled in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation effective period X72, an operation prompting notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A (a notification prompting image including characters “press!” Together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in a protruding state) is executed.

  In the “determined effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image of “flash c1” on the basis of the fact that the operation button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X72. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to the “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. ”Is performed, and“ determined effect ”(corresponding effect) is executed.

  (G-3-3) of FIG. 69 illustrates an example of “fixed effect C2”. When executing the “determined effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X72 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A as the operating means is enabled in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation effective period X72, an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the production lever 19A (a notification promotion image including the characters “pull!” Together with the image of the production lever 19A and the timer gauge) is executed.

  In the “determined effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X72. ) Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to the “operation position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. "Determined effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to "-2".

  Note that, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “determined effect C”. Position).

In the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect C”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determined effect C” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first result of the 16R (round) that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of the 4R (round) It informs that the player has won the "first jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

Then, in the period (g-4) of the “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and a notification that “character b1” has “defeated” the enemy is given in FIG. 62 (g-4). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 31st to 74th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high working hours gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern C013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and executes “Symbol change C3-1” in the period (g-3) from the timing T702. Attack reach C1-1 "is executed. When the specific effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 while the “attack reach C1-1” is being executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C013” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “determined effect C1” or the “determined effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. From the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol out of the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "b1" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image (G-1), the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "losing" is notified.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C021 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern C021” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ) Is performed from timing T801 to timing T803.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”. In the period (h-3) and the period (h-4) up to the timing T803, the “attack reach C2-1” is executed.

  In the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”, the effect content of “symbol fluctuation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 is “variation effect pattern C019”. This is the same as the effect content of “Symbol variation C3-1”. The operation valid period X81 shown in FIG. 68B corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (h-3) of the "attack reach C2-1", and the character "q2 (samurai)" sprints. Then, control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14, for example, to make an attack. The specific effect execution period W81 shown in FIG. 68B corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "determined effect C" as a special effect during the period (h-3) of the "attack reach C2-1". The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period X82 as shown in FIG. 68 (b) in the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”.

Then, in the period (h-4) of the “attack reach C2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that "character q2" has "defeated" the enemy Is displayed on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C015 (losing))
When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern C015” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C021” shown in (b) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h-3) from the timing T802. Attack reach C2-1 "is executed. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W81 during the execution of the “attack reach C2-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C015” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “determined effect C1” or the “determined effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. From the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "q2" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C023 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” at the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern C023” is selected, the sub CPU 102a determines in FIG. ) Is performed from timing T901 to timing T903.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C023”. “Attack reach C3-1” is executed in a period (i-3) and a period (i-4) until timing T903.

In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C023”, the effect content of “symbol change C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 is “variable effect pattern C019”. This is the same as the effect content of “Symbol variation C3-1”.
That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) of FIG. 68 (c) in the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2). Is displayed.
The operation valid period X91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value in the period (i-3) of the "attack reach C3-1", and the "character q3 (ronin)" sprints. Then, control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14, for example, to make an attack. The specific effect execution period W91 shown in FIG. 68C corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG.

The sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in the “variable effect pattern C023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.
When executing the “determined effect C1” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C023”, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period X92 as illustrated in FIG.

Then, in the period (i-4) of the “attack reach C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that "character q3" has "defeated" the enemy Is displayed on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.
(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 31st to 74th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern C017” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C023” shown in (c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902, and executes “the symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-3) from the timing T902. Attack reach C3-1 "is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern C017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decoration member 17A regardless of whether the “determination effect C1” or the “determination effect C2” of the “attack reach C3-1” is executed. From the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol out of the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "q3" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

Next, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the time reduction game state will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect control so as to execute the variable effect having the Janken effect in which the two characters perform “Janken” as the variable effect.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D019”. FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram for describing the temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D022”. FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram for describing a temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D25”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern D019 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” at the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern D019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ), Effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T1001 to timing T1003.

  FIG. 71 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 70A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, and a first decorative member 17A.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the “symbol variation D1-1” in the period (j-1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002, the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 to the timing T1003, In the period (j-5), effect control is performed to execute "Janken reach D1-1 (win)".

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. 71 in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed in the period (j-1) of the "symbol variation D1-1", and in the period (j-2). The effect control is performed so that the effect image of (j-2) in FIG. 71 in which the character display of “Janken 2 wins!” Is superimposed on the special effect design variation display is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the period (j-3) of "symbol variation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. The content of “j−3” in FIG. 71 is that the character “charr1” of the ally and the character “character u1” of the opponent perform the first game of the first match along with the reach of whether to perform. 1) or effect control for displaying the effect images of (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a uses the “Janken reach D1-D” as shown in the effect images (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) in FIG. "Development notice D" that encourages the development of "1 (win)". The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1” and “development notice D” as “development notice D” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

  The sub CPU 102a controls the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, during the period (j-3) in any case of executing the “advance notice D1” or the “advance notice D2” as a special effect. An operation valid period X101 to be validated is set.

  In the operation valid period X101, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. The sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in the protruding state (second state) as shown in (j-3-1) of FIG. The control is performed so as to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the operation 18A, and in the case of “development notice D2”, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Is controlled to be executed.

  When executing the “development notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in the protruding state (second state) in the operation effective period X101, and also shows the state shown in (j-3-1) of FIG. Thus, the effect image of "Character r1" and "Character u1" appearing as "Janken" in the introduction part of Janken, the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the characters "Press!" That is, an effect of displaying an effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 is executed.

On the other hand, when executing the “advance notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a determines that “character r1” and “character u1” are in the operation effective period X101 as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Along with the effect image of the appearance of "Janken" in the introduction part of Janken, the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge, and the effect image of the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is composed of the characters "Close!" The effect displayed on the display device 14 is executed.
Note that, when the effect promotion notification effect image is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

  When executing the “development notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a performs a special staging design of the reach-promoting staging based on a single pressing operation performed on the staging effect button 18A during the operation effective period X101. , And an effect image having an effect image (effect d1 (blue)) superimposed on an effect image in which “character r1” beats “character u1” in the first match of Janken ((j-3-3 in FIG. 65). )) Is displayed on the image display device 14, and a corresponding effect (advance notice) is executed.

  When executing the “development notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a performs a special staging design of the reach-pumping effect and the first round of the Janken game based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X101. , An effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 71) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) is superimposed on an effect image in which “character r1” is superior to “character u1”. 14, a corresponding effect (advance notice) is executed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W101 in the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1” and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W101, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72 (a) to the state of FIG. 72 (b) in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  As shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 71, in "janken reach D1-1 (win)" in the period (j-4) of "janken reach D1-1". When the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, "character notice D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as the “character announcement D” in accordance with the execution ratio of the “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

  Regardless of the case where any one of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation for validating the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4). The validity period Y101 is set. In the operation valid period X101, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation prompt to prompt the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, as shown in (j-4-1) and (j-4-2) of FIG. Do not execute.

  In the “character notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a determines, as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 71, based on that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X101. The control to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying “character d1”, which is a support character of “character r1”, on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In “character notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a sets “character d2”, which is a support character of “character r1”, based on a single pressing operation performed on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on the image display device 14.

  In “character notice D3”, the sub CPU 102a displays “character d3”, which is a support character of “character r1”, on the image display device based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X101. 14 is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) with contents such as displaying on the display 14.

  Then, after executing the “character notice D”, the sub CPU 102a outputs the “character notice” as shown in (j-4-4), (j-4-5), and (j-4-6) of FIG. An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating that “r1” and “character u1” will perform the second match of the Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” as a special effect in the effect of the second match of the Janken as shown in the effect images of (j-4-4) and (j-4-5) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in the “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

  When executing the “decided effect D1” as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A during the period (j-4) of the “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. Set X102. Then, in the operation valid period X102, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “goo”, “choki”, and “par”. The operation prompt for prompting the operation of the protruding state effect button 18A, which includes a protruding state effect button 18A and a timer gauge and a character display of "press!" The effect control is performed so that the notification image is displayed.

  In the “determined effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a in the image display device 14 based on the fact that one press operation is performed on the effect button 18A during the operation validity period X102, prompts the winning of a big hit on the image display device 14. The effect image of “d1” is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operating position 1-1” to the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 “ A "determined effect" (corresponding effect), such as moving to the "operation position 1-2" is executed.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D2” as a special effect, an operation for validating the operation of the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. The validity period X102 is set. Then, in the operation validity period X102, as shown in (j-4-5) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “goo”, “choki”, and “par”. Is displayed in the effect image of the state before issuing any of the above, an image of an operation prompt for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is made up of an effect lever 19A, a timer gauge, and a character display of "Close!" Production control is performed as follows.

  In the “determined effect D2”, based on the fact that the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X102, the sub CPU 102a uses the “flash d2” of An effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to the “operation position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. "Determined effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to "-2".

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “fixed effect D”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determined effect D” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the big hit determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first result of the 16R (round) that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of the 4R (round) It informs that the player has won the "first jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

After the execution of the “determined effect D” during the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “Janken 2” as shown in the effect image (j-4-7) of FIG. In the second round, after “chara r1” gives “choki” and “character u1” gives “par”, after displaying an effect image in which “character r1” beats “character u1”, the period (j) As shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 71 in -5), the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is the same as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. In this case, the effect control of displaying the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 71 on the image display device 14 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value is performed.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D010 (losing))
If the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and “variation effect pattern D010” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. A variation effect substantially similar to the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D1-1”, that is, the “character r1” in the period (j−1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002 to the “chara u1” in the first round. The control is performed such that "Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)" is executed after the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning with Janken. In this “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)”, the “character r1” is changed to “character u1” in the same manner as in the fluctuation effect in the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 of “Janken Reach D1-1 (winning)”. And a reach effect including an effect of performing the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “determined effect D” as the special effect in the period (j-4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D019”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D010” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “determined effect D1” and the “determined effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  However, in the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “fixed effect D1” in the “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)”, and then as illustrated in FIG. 71 (J-1). In the second round of the Janken, after "Character r1" displays "Choki" and "Character u1" displays "Goo", and after displaying a rendering image of "Character r1" losing to "Character u1", As shown in the effect image (J-2) of FIG. 71, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. In this way, an effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value is performed on the image display device 14. This notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern D022 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” at the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern D022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ) Is performed from timing T1101 to timing T1103.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation D2-1" in a period (k-1) to a period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, and performs a period (k-4) from the timing T1102 to the timing T1103; In the period (k-5), “Janken reach D2-1 (win)” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the same effect as “symbol variation D1-1” in “symbol variation D2-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (k-1). Then, in the period (k-2) of "symbol variation D2-1", an effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Janken three wins!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  In the period (k-3) of “symbol variation D2-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. Along with the reach of whether or not to do so, a performance image (not shown) that indicates that "Character r1" as an ally character and "Character u1" as an opponent character will perform the first round of Janken An effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” that stimulates the development to “Janken reach D2-1 (win)” in this reach-producing effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, and “development notice D” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, during the period (k-3) regardless of whether to execute the “advance notice D1” or the “advance notice D2” as a special effect. The validity period X111 is set.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value in the “janken reach D2-1 (win)” during the period (k-4) of the “janken reach D2-1”. Then, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as the “character announcement D” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W111 for executing the specific effect in the period (k-4). Then, in the specific effect execution period W111, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B in order to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed. When outputting an image, the effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 72 (c). Further, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG. 72 (c).

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period Y111 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (k-4) regardless of whether any of the "character announcement D1" to the "character announcement D3" is executed as the special effect. Set.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “Character Notice D” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, and then “Charr r1” and “Character u1” perform the second and third rounds of Janken and “Character U1”. An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating that “r1” continuously wins “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D” in the effect of the third round of Janken in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X112 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in a period of performing the third round of the Janken in the latter half of the period (k-4) of the “janken reach D2-1 (win)”. Set. In the operation validity period X112 of “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a determines that “character r1” and “character u1” have not performed any of “Goo”, “Choki”, and “Par” in the third round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of the above, an image of an operation prompting notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is made up of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the character display of "Let's press!" Production control is performed as follows. In addition, during the operation validity period X112 of the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a determines that “character r1” and “character u1” are any of “goo”, “choki”, and “par” in the third round of Janken. In the production image before production, production control is performed so as to display an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A, which is composed of a production lever 19A, a timer gauge, and a character display of "Let's draw!" I do.

After the execution of the “determined effect D” during the period (k-4) of the “janken reach D2-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a produces an effect in which “character r1” beats “character u1” in the third match of the Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing during the period (k-5) has the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed earlier. An effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value (777) is performed on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D013 (losing))
If the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and “variation effect pattern D013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a returns to FIG. A variation effect substantially similar to the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D2-1”, that is, the “character r1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102 to the “chara u1” in the first round. The control is performed such that "Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)" is executed after the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning with Janken. In this “Janken reach D2-1 (losing)”, “character r1” is changed to “character u1” in the same manner as in the fluctuation effect of the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 of “Janken reach D2-1 (winning)”. And the second and third rounds of Janken, but in the second round of Janken, "character r1" beats "character u1", and in the third round of Janken, "character r1" loses to "character u1". Perform reach production.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the specific effect when performing the specific effect in the period (k-4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D022”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D013”. And execute "decision effect D".

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “determined effect D1” and the “determined effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect D1” in “Janken reach D2-1 (losing)”, and then “character r1” changes to “Character r1” in the third round of the Janken match. After displaying the effect image of losing to "character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. This notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D025 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern D025” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. ) Is performed from timing T1201 to timing T1203.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation D3-1” in a period (l-1) to a period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, and performs a period (l-4) from the timing T1202 to the timing T1203 and In the period (1-5), “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the same effect as “symbol variation D1-1” in “symbol variation D3-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (l-1). Then, in the period (l-2) of the "symbol variation D3-1", an effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Let's win Janken four times!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  In the period (l-3) of "symbol variation D3-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. Along with the reach of whether or not to do so, a performance image (not shown) that indicates that "Character r1" as an ally character and "Character u1" as an opponent character will perform the first round of Janken An effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” that promotes the development to “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” in this reach-producing effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D” as “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in “fluctuating effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

  The sub-CPU 102a performs an operation for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, during the period (l-3) regardless of whether to execute the “advance notice D1” or the “advance notice D2” as a special effect. The validity period X121 is set.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 when executing the specific effect in the “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (1-4) of the “Janken reach D3-1”, and sets the specific effect execution period W121 in FIG. The specific effect determined with reference to FIG. 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” during the period (1-4) of “Janken reach D3-1”. Then, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as “character announcement D1” to “character announcement D1” to “character announcement D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period Y121 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (1-4) regardless of whether any of the "character notice D1" to the "character notice D3" is executed as the special effect. Set.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “Character notice D” in “Janken reach D3-1 (win)”, and then performs the second to fourth rounds of “Janken r2” and “Chara u1”. An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating that “r1” continuously wins “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D” in the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of the period (1-4). The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

  When performing the “decided effect D1” as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs the fourth effect of the Janken game in the latter half of the period (1-4) of the “janken reach D3-1 (win)”. An operation valid period X122 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A is set. In the operation validity period X122 of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” before any of “goo”, “choki”, and “par” in the fourth round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of the above, an image of an operation prompting notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is made up of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the character display of "Let's press!" Production control is performed as follows.

  Further, in the “decision effect D2”, in the operation effective period X122 of “the character r1” and “the character u1”, any one of “Goo”, “Choki”, and “Par” in the fourth round of the Janken match In the effect image before appearance, an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation on the effect lever 19A, which includes an effect lever 19A, a timer gauge, and a character display of “Let's draw!” Is displayed. Performs production control.

After the execution of the “determination effect D” during the period (1-4) of the “Janken reach D3-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a creates an appearance in which “character r1” beats “character u1” in the fourth round of the Janken game. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing during the period (1-5) has the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed earlier. An effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value (777) is performed on the image display device 14.
In this way, the player is notified that the big hit game (first big hit game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D016 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 75th to 84th fluctuation in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and “variation effect pattern D016” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets “variation effect pattern D025”. A fluctuation effect substantially the same as the fluctuation effect is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D3-1”, that is, the “character r1” in the period (l−1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202 to the “chara u1” in the first round. The control is performed such that "Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)" is executed after the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning with Janken. In this “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, similarly to the fluctuation effect in the period (1-4) from the timing T1202 of “Janken Reach D3-1 (winning)”, “character r1” is changed to “character u1”. And a reach effect including an effect of performing the second to fourth round of the game.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 in the period (1-4) as in the case of the "variable effect pattern D025" when executing the specific effect also in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern D016". The specific effect determined with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “determined effect D” as the special effect in the period (1-4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D025”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D016” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect D1” in “Janken reach D3-1 (losing)”, and then “character r1” changes to “Character r1” in the fourth round of the Janken. After displaying the effect image of losing to "character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. Then, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. This notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is "losing".

As described above, in the variable effects in the effect modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a keeps the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state (the first protruding state) during the operation validity period in which the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the effect button 18A is provided. State) or a protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state (first state) and the projecting state (second state) during the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the effect button 18A is not performed. State) and not to be.

  In addition, as described above, in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine Y performs the variable rendering of the rendering modes B to D, and the rendering mode B In the variable production (the 31st to 74th fluctuations), the operation effective period is set at a higher rate in the fluctuation production (the 31st to 74th fluctuations) than in the fluctuation production (the 1st to 30th fluctuations). The operation validity period is set at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the 75th to 84th fluctuation) in the effect mode D than in the effect.

(Specific examples of display results of each display unit)
Here, using FIG. 73, the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, A specific example of a display result stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the one-image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 will be described.

  First, details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived by each display device will be described.

  In the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, at the time of power-on (RAM clear), the right ends of six LEDs arranged in the left and right direction, which are special symbol display areas, are turned on (losing special symbol). The initial special symbol in the same manner as that described above is displayed), and the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position repeatedly moves one by one at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED toward the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. Lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the losing special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed until the next variable display is started on the first special symbol first display 60 (the second special symbol first display). During the execution of the fluctuation display on the display 61 or during the execution of the jackpot game), the state where the stop display is maintained is maintained, and the loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol first display 61 is Until the next variation display is started on the second special symbol first display 61 (during the execution of the variation display or the big hit game on the first special symbol first display 60), the stop display is kept. State is maintained.

  In the first special symbol second display 88 and the second special symbol second display 89, one LED serving as the fourth symbol display area is turned off when the power is turned on (RAM is cleared) (in the same manner as the fourth pattern). Initially, the fourth symbol is displayed), and the variable symbol of the fourth symbol is synchronized (synchronized) with the variable symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, turning off and lighting of one LED are repeated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally, the LED is turned off or turned on, and the fourth lost symbol or the fourth big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The lighting cycle of the LED may be earlier than the lighting cycle (0.25 seconds) of the LED of the special symbol first display.

  Then, the fourth lost symbol or the fourth big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second display 88 is displayed until the next variable display is started on the first special symbol second display 88 (the second special symbol). While the variable display is being executed on the second display 89 or the jackpot game is being executed), the stop display is maintained, and the fourth lost symbol or the big hit stopped and displayed on the second special symbol second display 89 is maintained. The fourth symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started on the second special symbol second display 89 (during the execution of the variable display on the first special symbol second display 88 or the execution of the big hit game). The display is maintained as it is.

  In the image display device, at the time of power-on (RAM clear), an initial effect symbol different from three effect symbols (losing effect symbol and jackpot effect symbol) predetermined in effect symbol display areas (left area, center area, right area). ) Is displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols are scrolled up and down, and finally, the loss effect symbol or the big hit effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area until the next variable display is started, until the customer waiting effect is executed, or until the jackpot game is executed. Is kept stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the effect symbol display area when a customer waiting effect is executed or a jackpot game is executed. It should be noted that the initial effect design may be the same as the loss effect design.

  In addition, in the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one special symbol (an initial special symbol in the same mode as the losing special symbol) is displayed in a special symbol display area. The fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the fluctuation display of the symbol. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally, the loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area until the next variable display is started, until the customer waiting effect is executed, or until the jackpot game is executed. Is stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when a customer waiting effect is executed or a jackpot game is executed.

  As described above, the size of the fourth symbol display area disposed inside the game area 2A is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol second display is smaller than the special symbol first display). Is smaller in number of LEDs), so that the area inside the game area 2A is not extremely narrowed. Also, the special symbol display area has a larger area size than the fourth symbol display area (the special symbol first display has a larger number of LEDs than the special symbol second display). On the other hand, it becomes easier to accurately report the result of the game.

  Next, a specific example of a display result stopped and displayed on each display as a result of the variable display will be described.

The special symbol first displays 60 and 61 derive and display one of a display result indicating one type of special loss symbol and a display result indicating 22 types of special jackpot symbols.
Specifically, in the display result showing the special losing symbol, one LED on the right end is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off, as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear). In other words, the display result of the first special symbol first display 60 indicating the loss special symbol and the display result of the second special symbol first display 61 indicating the special loss symbol are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol, two to five LEDs are turned on, and the remaining LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, as a result of the special symbol determination, it is different from the big hit game (the big winning opening 8 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than the big hit game, and the game state changes. When the small hitting game can be executed, the display result indicating the special small hitting symbol on the first special symbol display 60, 61 is the display result indicating the loss special symbol or the display result indicating the special big hitting symbol. The display result may be different from the display result. In addition, when there is only one small hitting game, the display result showing the special small hitting pattern is also one kind. However, when there are plural kinds of small hitting games, the display result showing the special small hitting pattern is also small. It is good to have a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

The special symbol second display unit derives and displays one of a display result indicating one type of the fourth lost symbol and a display result indicating one type of the fourth big hit symbol.
Specifically, in the display result showing the fourth design, the one LED is turned off as in the case of turning on the power (clearing the RAM).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the fourth big hit symbol, one LED is turned on.

  When the above-mentioned small hitting game is executable, the display result indicating the fourth small hitting symbol on the special symbol second display indicates the display result indicating the fourth losing symbol or the fourth large hitting symbol. The display result may be different from the display result. When there is only one small hitting game, the display result indicating the fourth small hitting symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of small hitting games, the display result indicating the fourth small hitting symbol is also obtained. It is better to have a plurality of types corresponding to the types of the small hit games.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of a display result indicating 23 or more loss effect symbols and a display result indicating 10 types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the loss effect symbols, the combination of three effect symbols having three effect symbols that are not the same and do not have regularity (the irregular pattern) is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot effect symbols, the same combination of the three effect symbols (9 types of 111 to 999) is stopped.

  When the above-described small hitting game is executable, the display result indicating the small hit effect design on the image display device 14 is different from the display result indicating the loss effect design and the display result indicating the big hit effect design. The display result may be the same as the display result indicating the predetermined jackpot effect symbol. In addition, when there is only one small hitting game, the display result indicating the small hitting design symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of small hitting games, the display result indicating the small hitting design symbol is also small. It is good to have a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

In the special symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of a display result indicating one type of special loss symbol and a display result indicating one type of special jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the special losing symbol, the "x" symbol is in a stopped state as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol, the symbol “○” is in a stopped state.
When the above-mentioned small hitting game can be executed, the display result showing the special small hitting symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display device 14 shows the display result showing the special loss winning symbol and the special big hitting symbol. The display result may be different from the display result. When there is only one small hit game, the display result showing the special small hit pattern is also one kind, but when there are plural kinds of small hit games, the display result showing the special small hit pattern is also small. It is good to have a plurality of types corresponding to the types of games.

  As described above, while there are a plurality of types of display results showing the special jackpot design, there is only one type of display result showing the special loss symbol. Or loss can be easily determined. Note that if the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol is smaller than the type of the display result indicating the special special jackpot, the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol may be two or more.

  In addition, while only one LED is turned on in the display result showing the special jackpot design, two or more LEDs are turned on in the display result showing the special jackpot symbol. It is possible to do.

  Further, since there are a plurality of types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each special jackpot symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game is to be executed, and which type of jackpot game is to be executed. , It is possible to improve the player's expectation of the game.

  In addition, when the display result indicating the special losing symbol is derived and displayed, the LED different from the LED illuminated at the start of the fluctuation is lit, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol is displayed even when the fluctuation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize that it was done.

  In addition, when the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED different from the LED that is lit at the start of the fluctuation is lit, so even if the fluctuation time is extremely short, the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

  In addition, since there are fewer types of display results indicating the big hit fourth symbol and display results indicating the special jackpot design than types of display results indicating the special jackpot special symbol, by checking the fourth symbol and the special symbol, It is possible to instantaneously determine whether the hit is a jackpot or a loss. The type of the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol may be smaller than the type of the display result indicating the fourth symbol big hit and the display result indicating the special special jackpot symbol.

  Also, since there are fewer types of display results that show the jackpot effect design than types of display results that show the special jackpot design, there are fewer types of display results that show the special jackpot design. This makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. It should be noted that the type of the display result indicating the special jackpot design may be smaller than the type of the display result indicating the special jackpot effect symbol.

  In addition, since the size of the display result indicating the special losing symbol and the size of the display result indicating the fourth losing symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed with one LED), it is easy to grasp the correspondence between the two. , It is easier to recognize that the player is losing.

  In addition, since the display result indicating the special jackpot design includes an LED that is lit in the display result indicating the special loss symbol, the display result indicating the special special jackpot indicates the special loss result when the display result indicating the special special jackpot is derived. It is possible to reduce a bad impression on the display result.

  In addition, no matter what kind of jackpot game is played, the display result indicating the special jackpot design includes the LED that is lit in the display result indicating the special loss symbol, so that the special loss symbol is displayed. Can be further reduced.

  Also, during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, there is no state in which all LEDs are turned off or a state in which a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and one LED is always turned on. Therefore, it is easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.

  In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, a plurality of types of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side) that are not finally stopped and displayed, except for the display result indicating the lost special symbol Since the first one LED is lit (displayed), it is easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.

(Display Example of First Game Information Display Device, Second Game Information Display Device, and First Image Display Device)
74 to 79 are diagrams illustrating display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Specifically, FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-time saving game state, and FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating the reach effect ( FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a display example during a SP-reach effect), FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a display example during a movement effect by a movable effect member during a blackout effect, and FIG. 77 to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display example, and FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display example at the time of occurrence of a power interruption.

First, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIGS. 74 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes of an example of an effect using a specific music notice pattern. FIG. 74 (a) shows the present indication effect (the effect before reach). Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol that turns on the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol holding first display 63. Indicates that two LEDs are lit, indicating that two first reservations are stored.
In addition, the second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol holding first Both the display 64 and the ordinary symbol hold first display 65 turn off the LED, indicating that the hold (second hold, ordinary figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. The two indicators 83 light up two LEDs to indicate that two first holds are stored.
In addition, the second special symbol second display 89 and the normal symbol second display 82 turn off the LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol holding second display. 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary figure hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displays the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode, and the second display section displays the special display mode 3 The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. . Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  FIG. 74B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the change of the first special symbol is continuously performed and no new holding (first holding, second holding, general drawing holding) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device are not generated. At 79, the same display as that of FIG. 74A is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the display of the reserved icons in the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icons TH in the variable icon display area 70D. Is erased, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size at the upper left so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect).
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the number-of-holds display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) are provided. The special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed as in FIG. 74 (a).

FIG. 74 (c) shows an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) has been completed and the effect symbol has been stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is going.
Since no new holding (first holding, second holding, ordinary drawing holding) has occurred, the first special symbol holding first display 63, the second special symbol first display 61, the second special symbol holding are not generated. The first display 64, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol holding first display 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the change of the first special symbol is a loss. I have.
Since no new holding (first holding, second holding, ordinary drawing holding) is newly generated, the first special symbol holding second display 83, the second special symbol second display 89, the second special symbol holding are held. The second display 84, the ordinary symbol second display 90, and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first holding icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second holding icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the fluctuations which are not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect). The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display section. Further, the change icon displayed in the change icon display area 70D has disappeared since the change has been completed. Further, “2” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number-of-retentions display area SH1. In addition, in the effect symbol and the first special symbol display area DZ1, stop display is performed in a manner showing a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As described above, in the fluctuation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol change display is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. , 61, special symbol second indicators 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and effect symbols and special symbol display areas of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first special symbol display area DZ1, Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), the change display of the special symbol can be easily grasped.
In addition, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) is indicated by the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding first display 63 and 64 of the second game information display device 79. The two displays 88 and 89, the reserved icon display areas (first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, and the reserved number display area ( Since the information is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be easily grasped.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), in order to pay attention to the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is provided. Although the display of the hold icons in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) has been deleted, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. The first displays 63, 64, the special symbol holding second displays 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the holding number display area (first holding number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Since the display is performed in the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped.

  Also, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the normal gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to disturb the reach effect (SP reach effect). Are reduced, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second indicators 88 and 89, and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 are displayed. The size of the special symbols displayed on the display is maintained without being reduced, so even if you lose track of the staging symbols, you can check whether or not the variable display is displayed by checking each display. Becomes

  In addition, in the first special symbol holding second display 88 and the second special symbol holding second display 89, the holding change notice for changing the display mode is not executed. It will be displayed in a display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

  In addition, in the first special symbol holding first display 63 and the second special symbol holding first display 64, the holding change notice for changing the display mode is not executed. It will be displayed in a display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

  Further, in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, and the display indicating the hold number is always displayed in the normal display mode. Will be. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

  In addition, in the icon display area composed of the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, the first reserved icon display area corresponds to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second holding number decreases, the first holding icon or the second holding icon moves (shifts) to the changing icon display area 70D, and the holding reduction effect (the holding number decreases) displayed as the changing icon is displayed. Is performed, but in the number-of-holds display area composed of the first number-of-holds display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2, the first number-of-holds When the number or the second reserved number decreases, the number is only subtracted without performing the reserved decrease effect as described above. Therefore, by checking the reserved number display area, it becomes easy to grasp the pure reserved number itself. The display as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

Note that even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of holds (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is held (second hold number). Although the display of the number of 1 hold and the number of 2nd hold was displayed without being deleted, the number of holds (1st hold) of the number of hold display areas (1st hold number display area SH1 and 2nd hold number display area SH2) was displayed. The number and the number of the second hold may be deleted. Also, in the SP reach effect of FIG. 75 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 76 (a), the movement effect and the SPSP reach effect of FIG. , The display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) in the second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted.
As described above, during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, moving effect), the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is provided. Display of the hold icons in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the hold numbers (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display areas (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). Even if the display of the number is deleted, the display of the number of reservations (the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations) is displayed on the special symbol reservation second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79. Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during a reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the time reduction game state. is there.

FIG. 75 (a) is a fluctuation effect before the reach effect (SP reach effect) in the time-saving gaming state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs a variation display of the second special symbol blinking the LED in a predetermined order, and the second special symbol holding first display 64. Indicates that two LEDs are lit, indicating that two second reservations are stored. Further, the ordinary symbol first display 62 performs a variation display of the ordinary symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. Since the right-handed first display 67 is in a time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform right-handed display.
The first special symbol first display 60 turns on a predetermined LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol holding first display 63 and the normal symbol holding first display 65. Indicates that none of the LEDs are turned off, and that the hold (first hold, general-purpose hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol holding second. The display 84 turns on two LEDs to indicate that two second holds are stored. In addition, the second symbol display 90 of the ordinary symbol performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order in correspondence with the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Since the right-handed second display 87 is in a time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform right-handed display.
The first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol reservation second display 83 and the normal symbol reservation second display 85 are All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that the hold (second hold, general-purpose hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the holding icons H21 and H22 are displayed on the first display portion 70C1 and the second display portion 70C2 of the second holding icon display regions 70C1 to 70C4, and the changing icon is displayed on the changing icon display region 70D. "2" indicating the second hold number is displayed in the two hold number display area SH2. In addition, since a time-saving game is being played, an image G10 “Right-hand →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol does not change, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific game state (“high-probability game state” and “time-saving game state”) is displayed. ing.

FIG. 75 (b) shows a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the change of the second special symbol is continuously performed, the first display 61 of the second special symbol 61 performs the variable display similarly to FIG. 75 (a). . Then, one second hold is newly generated and the second hold number is three, so the second special symbol hold first display 64 flashes the left LED and turns on the right LED, This indicates that three second reservations are stored. In addition, since two general-purpose reservations have been generated and the number of general-purpose reservations has become two, the first ordinary symbol reservation first display 65 turns on two LEDs, and two general-purpose reservations are stored. Is shown.
Note that the first special symbol holding first display 63 remains off because the first holding has not newly occurred.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 75 (a). Then, one second hold is newly generated, and the second hold number becomes three, so the second special symbol hold second display 84 blinks the left LED and turns on the right LED, This indicates that three second reservations are stored. In addition, since two general-purpose reservations have been generated and the number of general-purpose reservations has become two, the second ordinary symbol-reservation second display 85 turns on two LEDs, and two general-purpose reservations are stored. It indicates that
Since the first reservation has not newly occurred, the first special symbol reservation second display 83 remains off.

  On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. In addition, the display of the reserved icons in the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the reserved icons in the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icons TH in the variable icon display area 70D is erased, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left. Thus, the reach production (SP reach production) is not obstructed. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the number-of-holds display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) 75 (a), the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In addition, on the second image display device (sub-liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that a reach effect (SP reach effect) is being displayed is displayed.

Then, FIG. 75 (c) shows an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 causes the LEDs to be displayed in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the second special symbols is performed. Is going.
In addition, since no new holding (first holding, second holding, general symbol holding) has occurred, the first special symbol first display 60, the first special symbol holding first display 63, the second special symbol holding are held. The first display 64 and the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 perform the same display as in FIG. 75 (b). Also, the right-handed first display 67 remains lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, indicating that the variation of the second special symbol is a loss. I have.
Since no new holding (first holding, second holding, ordinary drawing holding) has occurred, the first special symbol second display 88, the first special symbol holding second display 83, the second special symbol holding The second display 84 and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 perform the same display as in FIG. 75 (b). In addition, the right-handed second indicator 87 remains lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a loss corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol. I have. Also, the displays of the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display areas 70D that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect) are displayed again. In the second holding icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, a holding icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1, a holding icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and a holding icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the change icon displayed in the change icon display area 70D has disappeared since the change has been completed. Further, “3” indicating the second hold number is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol does not change, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub-liquid crystal) 71, character information (“sorry”) indicating loss is displayed.

As described above, in the fluctuation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the time-saving game state, the special symbol change display is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59, 61, the special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol and the special symbol display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (the first special symbol display area DZ1, 2 is displayed in the special symbol display area DZ2), so that the change display of the special symbol can be easily grasped.
In addition, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) is indicated by the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding first display 63 and 64 of the second game information display device 79. The two displays 88 and 89, the reserved icon display areas (first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, and the reserved number display area ( Since the information is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be easily grasped.
The right-handed display is a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 is displayed as “Right-hand →→” display, it is easy to grasp the right-hand display.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the holding icon display areas (first holding icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second holding icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are held. Although the display of the icon is deleted, the display of the number of reservations (the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations) is performed by the special symbol reservation first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. The special symbol holding second indicators 88 and 89 of the display device 79 and the number-of-holds display areas (the first number-of-holds display area SH1 and the second number-of-holds display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are shown. Since it is displayed, the number of reservations (the first number of reservations and the second number of reservations) can be grasped.

  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the time-saving gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to disturb the reach effect (SP reach effect). Are displayed in the special symbol first display units 60 and 61, the fourth symbol displayed in the special symbol second display units 88 and 89, and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. Because the size of the special symbol is maintained without being reduced, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the effect symbol is lost. .

  In addition, the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the reserved icons in the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icons TH in the variable icon display area 70D are displayed. As an effect for deleting the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, but is not limited to the SP reach effect.

  For example, the display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the display of the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly darken during the fluctuation effect as shown in FIG. 76 (a), and shift to a specific notice effect. During the effect (a so-called blackout effect) that evolves into a reach effect or a so-called blackout effect, the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are provided. The display of the hold icon and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the display of the number of holds (the first number of hold and the second number of hold) is changed to the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, special symbol holding second display 88, 89 of the second game information display 79, and the holding number display area of the first image display (main liquid crystal) 14 (first holding number display) Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) while preventing the blackout effect from being hindered.

  In addition, when the moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the variable effect, the first holding on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is performed when the movable effect member 73 moves as shown in FIG. The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icons TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is cleared. ) Are displayed on the special symbol holding first displays 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second displays 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device ( The display is made in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SH1, second reserved number display area SH2) of the main liquid crystal) 14.

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

  Also, although not shown, in the SPSP reach effect, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 has the same effect as in FIGS. 74 (b), 75 (c), 76 (a) and 76 (b). The display of the reserved icons in the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted, and the number of reservations (the first reserved number, the second The display of the (number of reservations) is a special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, a special symbol reservation second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display. The display is made in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SH1, second reserved number display area SH2) of the device (main liquid crystal) 14.

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being obstructed.

Next, FIGS. 77 to 78 will be described.
77 to 78 show display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during the jackpot game.

FIG. 77 (a) shows the first round game effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 turns on the LED in a stop mode indicating a probable big hit, performs a stop display of the first special symbol, and the round number display 66 indicates The LED is turned on in a mode indicating the number of rounds of the probability change jackpot 2 (8 rounds) to indicate that the number of rounds of the current jackpot game is eight, and the first special symbol reservation first display 63 has two LEDs. Blinks, indicating that four first holds are stored. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in a big hit game, the LED is turned on to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 light predetermined LEDs to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol holding first display 64 and the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 turn off both LEDs, indicating that the holding (second holding, ordinary drawing holding) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 illuminates and displays an LED, performs a stop display indicating a big hit, and the first special symbol reservation second display 83 displays two LEDs. Blinking to indicate that four first reservations are stored. In addition, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol second indicator 89 and the ordinary symbol second indicator 90 light predetermined LEDs to indicate that the second special symbol and the ordinary symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol holding second display 84 and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 turn off both LEDs, indicating that the holding (second holding, ordinary drawing holding) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first round gaming effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first holding icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, which are displayed before the start of the jackpot game, the second holding The display of the hold icon in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, a stop display indicating a big hit of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. In addition, since the big hit game is being played, an image G10 “Right-hand →→” is displayed at the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2, and the second special symbol is not changed, so the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. In addition, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“Round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being played.

FIG. 77 (b) shows a promotion effect performed between the first opening and the fourth closing of the special winning opening 8 of the fifth round game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, since a general-purpose reservation has newly occurred, the ordinary symbol-reservation first display 65 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four general-purpose reservations are stored. As shown in the figure, the normal symbol first display 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. The displays other than the ordinary symbol first display 62 and the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 are continuously displayed as in FIG. 77 (a).
Also, in the second game information display device 79, the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four ordinary symbol holdings are stored, and the ordinary symbol second display 90 indicates a predetermined symbol. The normal symbol variation display is performed by blinking the LEDs in this order. The displays other than the ordinary symbol second display 90 and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 are continuously displayed as in FIG. 77 (a).

On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect. Here, the display of the image G10 “Right-turn →→” displayed before the promotion effect is performed is deleted.
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the number-of-holds display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information indicating the number of round games is deleted (not displayed).

  FIG. 77 (c) shows a movement effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as that in FIG. 77 (b) is continuously displayed.

  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Also, as in FIG. 77 (b), the display of the image G10 “Right-hand →→” remains erased, and the special symbols in the special symbol display areas (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2). (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), the display similar to FIG. 72 (b) is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and FIG. ) Are displayed below the special symbol display areas (the first special symbol display area DZ1 and the second special symbol display area DZ2).

  As described above, by the effect performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the number of reservations (the first number of reservations, the first number of reservations, By changing the display position of the (second hold number), the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) are mutually displayed ( Directing) is prevented.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows an effect performed from the fifth opening of the special winning opening 8 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as that in FIG. 77 (c) is performed.

The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect of notifying (notifying) that the big hit game will be continuously performed after the fifth round game using the character image. In addition, the image G10 “Right-turn →→” that was not displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the number-of-holds display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In addition, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (not displayed).

  FIG. 78 (b) shows the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as that in FIG. 79A is performed.

  On the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed. Also, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) of the number-of-holds display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) 78 (a), the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) and the display of the image G10 “Right-turn →→” are continuously displayed. I have. In addition, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 ("BONUS end") indicating that the big hit game has ended.

  Then, FIG. 78 (c) shows an effect indicating that the big hit game has ended and the game has shifted to the time reduction game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 terminates (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the big hit ends. Note that the first game information display device 59 performs the same display as that of FIG. 78 (b) except for the round number display 66. Also, the second game information display device 79 performs the same display as that in FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display areas 70D that are not displayed during the big hit game are displayed. The display is displayed again, and the reserved icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. I have. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. In the special symbol display areas (the first special symbol display area DZ1 and the second special symbol display area DZ2), the stop display is performed because the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change. In addition, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high-probability gaming state” and “time-saving gaming state”) is displayed. You.

As described above, during the big hit game, the holding icons in the holding icon display areas (the first holding icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second holding icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and the fluctuations are displayed in order to pay attention to the big hit game effects. Although the display of the fluctuating icon TH in the icon display area 70D is deleted, the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) is performed by the special symbol holding first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. , 64, a special symbol holding second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and a holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding area) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since this is displayed as the number of holdings display area SH2), the number of holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) can be grasped.
The right-handed display is a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 is displayed as “Right-clicking →→”, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.

  In addition, even during a jackpot game, during the promotion effect, the image G10 “Right-hand →→” display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is deleted, but the right-hand display is the first game information display. Since the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display 79 are displayed, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

  The right-handed display includes lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 with nothing marked, lighting of the LED of the right-handed second display 87 marked "right-handed", and The image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays the image G10 “Right-handed →→”. In other words, the right-handed display is displayed in a display manner in which the right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67. Also, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. Further, the right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 than the right-handed first display 67, so that the right-handed second display 87 can be seen by the player. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 79 will be described.
FIG. 79 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when a power interruption occurs.

FIG. 79 (a) is a fluctuation effect before the reach effect in the normal game state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol blinking the LED in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol holding first display 63. Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first reservations are stored.
The second special symbol first display 61 and the normal symbol first display 62 light predetermined LEDs to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol holding first display 64 and the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 turn off both LEDs, indicating that the holding (second holding, ordinary drawing holding) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. The two indicators 83 blink four LEDs, indicating that four first reservations are stored.
Note that the second special symbol second display 81 and the ordinary symbol second display 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the ordinary symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol holding second display 84 and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 turn off both LEDs, indicating that the holding (second holding, ordinary drawing holding) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed, and the change icon display is performed. The change icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. Further, “4” indicating the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol does not change, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  Then, since the power interruption occurred and the supply of the power supply voltage was cut off, nothing was found in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. It is not displayed (FIG. 79 (b)).

  Thereafter, when the power is restored from the power interruption, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 101a displays all displays (special symbol first displays 60 and 61, ordinary symbol first display 62, special symbol holding) based on the backup data. The first displays 63 and 64, the ordinary symbol holding first display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed first display 67, the high-probability game state display 68, and the time reduction game state display 69) are restored. However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 102a, based on the special symbol storage designation command and the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery, the special symbol hold second display 83, The display of the second symbol 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 is restored. On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 provides a power restoration effect for notifying that the power is being restored based on the fact that the image control board 105 has received the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of restoration. Do.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed, the image control board 105 displays the number-of-suspended display area (first The suspended number display (first suspended number display, second suspended number display) in the suspended number display area SH1 and the second suspended number display area SH2 is restarted (recovered) (FIG. 79 (d)).

  As described above, when the power is restored due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the numbers of the holdings (the first number of holdings and the second number of holdings) are displayed on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second displays 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and thereafter, the number-of-reservation display area (the first reservation) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 The number-of-reservations display (first-reserve number display, second-reserve number display) in the number display area SH1 and the second-reserve number display area SH2 is restored and displayed. In other words, when the power is restored, the number of holds on the second game information display device 79 is smaller than the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. The display of (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed (restored) first.

  In this way, by restoring the display of the number of holdings (the first number of holdings, the second number of holdings) on the second game information display device 79 prior to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the second game information display device 79. The first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped by the player.

In the present embodiment, the display of the number of special symbols to be held is usually performed by the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding first display 63 and 64 of the second game information display device 79. 2 displays 83, 84, a reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second reserved icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and a reserved number display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. The first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) are displayed in four places, and during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, moving effect) and a jackpot effect If it is in the middle, the special symbol reservation first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol reservation second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image table Apparatus (main LCD) 14 number of holding the display area of the (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if it is after restoration after a power failure, the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding second indicators 83 and 84 of the second game information display device 79 are provided. Is displayed in two places.
That is, the display of the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed at two places, at three places, or at four places, depending on the progress of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved icon display areas 70B, 70C and the reserved icons displayed there are smaller than the LEDs of the special symbol reserved first indicators 63, 64 and the special symbol reserved second indicators 83, 84. Is large, and is displayed at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine so that the player can easily recognize it. However, the special icons are more special than the holding icon display areas 70B and 70C and the holding icons displayed there. Even if the LEDs of the reserved first indicators 63 and 64 and the special symbol reserved second indicators 83 and 84 are enlarged or arranged at a position near the center of the gaming machine, the player can easily recognize the LEDs. Good.

  Note that in FIGS. 73 to 79, the number-of-suspended display areas SH1, SH2 and the arithmetic numerals displayed there are larger than the reserved icon display areas 70B, 70C and the reserved icons displayed there. Although it is easy to visually recognize, the reserved icon display areas 70B and 70C and the reserved icons displayed there are larger than the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numerals displayed there, and are visually recognized. You may make it easy.

(Structures of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79)
FIG. 80 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is disposed adjacent to the outer rail member 29C at the lower left of the game area 2A, but is not limited thereto, and may be disposed at various positions. Can be.

  The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information relating to a special symbol determination and a normal symbol determination (in other words, information relating to a profit given to a player in a game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first displays 60 and 61, first and second special symbol holding first displays 63 and 64, a round number display 66, The right-handed first display 67, the high-probability game state display 68, the time-saving game state display 69, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65 can be configured.

  In addition, the second game information display device 79 also displays information relating to the profit given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol second displays 88, 89, 1, a second special symbol holding second display 83, 84, a right-handed second display 87, a normal symbol second display 82, and a normal symbol holding second display 85.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 80, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 include first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64, a high-probability game state indicator 68, and a time-saving game state indicator 69. , A right-handed first display 67, a round number display 66, a normal design first display 62, and a normal design hold first display 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in a row along the launching ball guide path of the game ball formed by the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C (see FIG. 1). The arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launching ball guide path of the game ball, or may be arranged in three or more rows. , May be arranged irrespective of the launch ball guide path.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display substrate 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted, and a first cover that covers at least a front side of the first display substrate 4200. A member 4202 and a protection member 4204 that covers the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is installed in an upright position such that the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the surface of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 make it difficult or impossible to access the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2 by fitting it into a mounting opening (not shown) formed in the board member. The light of the LED 4045 is visible from the user. In addition, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member), and a connector 4100 (FIG. 81) described later provided so as to face the back side. It is accessible from the back. Note that the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

  The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 by screwing, bonding, or other methods, to the game board 2. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove and reassemble with the game board 2 by bonding or the like, or when the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 are removed from the game board 2. It may be attached in a configuration in which a trace remains on any of them. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 has a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59. 1 The game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed and cannot be assembled as before, and the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed by removal. At least one of the configurations in which traces of removal remain on the second or first game information display device 59 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the first display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs 4045 on a front surface facing a player, and can emit light from each LED 4045 toward the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200 instead of through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 4045 to a hole in the printed board. In the first display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not arranged on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200 in two rows. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED 4045, a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as the LED 4045 can be mounted on the surface. Under the control of the control means of the main control board 101, the first display substrate 4200 controls the state of the plurality of LEDs 4045 such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and the like. Information on the profit given to the player due to a change or the like is displayed.

  As described above, by mounting the LEDs 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the space for disposing the LEDs 4045 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the weight can be reduced and the number of failures can be reduced. In addition, since the LED 4045 is surface-mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in through-hole mounting. Therefore, on the first display substrate 4200, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively used. The first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 82) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. You may. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in a front area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front area. An absorbing section may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, light emitted from the LED 4045 is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be used efficiently. In the case where the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused by the absorbing portion on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 85 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 viewed from the front side. The first special symbol first display 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol first display 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol reservation first display 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, and the second special symbol is provided. The reserved first display 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. On the right side of the second special symbol holding first display 64, one LED 4045 constituting each of the high-probability game state display 68, the time saving game state display 69, and the right-handed first display 67 is arranged in this order. They are arranged side by side. Also, the round number display 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the lower left side of the lower row, and the ordinary symbol first display 62 is composed of three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66, and is an ordinary symbol holding first display. Reference numeral 65 denotes two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted, and via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 101 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack to which a plug provided at an end of the harness is detachable, and may have any of a male terminal shape and a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be a through-hole mount for fixing the lead of the connector 4100 to a hole in the printed circuit board, but is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 in this embodiment. In the connector 4100, a connector opening provided at an end of the harness, into which a plug is inserted, opens rearward in FIG. As described above, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the first display substrate 4200 does not protrude a lead for connecting the connector 4100 to a circuit on the front surface, and no solder for fixing the connector 4100 is disposed on the front surface. As described above, by mounting the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 is made more compact. be able to.

  The connector 4100 is arranged on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to a mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with the first display substrate 4200 interposed therebetween. In this manner, by mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the through hole mounting. Therefore, on the first display substrate 4200, the connector 4100 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively used. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a chip-type resistor 4500 as a current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 are located at positions where they do not overlap with the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. Further, the resistor 4500 may be a through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the resistor 4500 to a hole of a printed circuit board, but is surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200 in this embodiment. In the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, no lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit protrudes from the front surface, and no solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is arranged on the front surface. In the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged side by side in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 88, the resistor 4500 is disposed between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display substrate 4200, and limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less. This prevents an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045.

  As described above, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, even if the resistor 4500 fails, the first game information display device 59 can be dealt with by replacing it, and maintenance can be performed. It will be easier. Since the replacement of the first game information display device 59 can be easily performed, the pause period of the game can be shortened, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being spoiled. In addition, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 in the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 4500 may have either a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the front and the rear and a configuration in which the mounting region partially overlaps. In this manner, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the through hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, and the front and rear surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 can be effectively used. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 having windows 4206 corresponding to the LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200, and a front cover portion. 4208 is provided on the periphery of 4208 so as to rise to the rear side. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape that opens rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210, and has a first display area in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210. The substrate 4200 can be stored. Then, when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the area inside the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is closer to the front cover portion 4208 than the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210 (the rear end). On the front side), the entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the area inside the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted, with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front and peripheral surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment is configured such that the inner region is formed so as to correspond to a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed while being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the side, and the first display substrate 4200 Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, the first cover member 4202 is provided with a window 4206 penetrating the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 by the window defining portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. It is defined. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided to correspond to a predetermined number of two or more LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 is formed in a shape such as a polygon such as a quadrangle or a circle, and is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that one or a plurality of the corresponding LED 4045 entirely enters the inside. The windows 4206 are formed in two rows in the first cover member 4202, and when the first cover member 4202 is arranged in a state where the first cover member 4202 covers the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 is set to each LED 4045. The state of lighting of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.

  As shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 back and forth, defines a window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, and displays the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. Each of the windows 4206 has a window defining unit 4212 configured to be distinguishable. The window defining portion 4212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (this embodiment) projecting rearward from the front cover portion 4208, and a portion corresponding to the front side of the mounting region of the LED 4045 in the front cover portion 4208 is formed thick. It is provided depending on the configuration and the like. When the window defining portion 4212 is formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated and independent from each other, or a part of the adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, the window defining portion 4212, for example, has a thickness greater than or equal to the thickness of the horizontal cover portion 4210 or the first display substrate 4200. A long distance is provided to some extent, and the window defining portion 4212 functions as a light guiding portion for guiding the light emitted from the LED 4045, thereby preventing the light from being diffused. In other words, even if a configuration is provided in which a gap is provided between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, or a portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is projected forward. The window defining portion 4212 defining the window 4206 can guide the light of the LED 4045 to the front side without any leakage.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 such that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and The entire periphery of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window defining portion 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the cylindrical window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining portion 4212. Note that the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are in contact with the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 only when the window defining portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 contacts the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. It is basically configured so that there is a gap between the first display substrate 4200 and the surface. As described above, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining portion 4212 that defines the window 4206, the state of the LED 4045 via the window 4206 does not diffuse the light emitted from the LED 4045. Can be more easily identified. In addition, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 and closes the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200, light can be transmitted from the gap. Leakage into the window 4206 can be prevented, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if a fraudulent tool is intruded from the window 4206, the fraudulent tool can be cut off only in the window 4206 by the window defining unit 4212, and the fraudulent act can be more appropriately prevented. Note that the rear surface (the rear surface) of the window defining portion 4212 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 may face each other so that a slight gap is left therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 includes a projection-shaped alignment portion 4600 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 4212 so as to protrude rearward from a rear surface of the window defining portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment portion 4600 is configured to be fitted in a substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 85) formed in the first display substrate 4200 so that the first display substrate 4200 can be aligned with the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are dispersedly arranged on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Note that among the plurality of alignment units 4600, there may be one formed separately from the window defining unit 4212. Each positioning section 4600 is formed in a columnar shape. Although the alignment portion 4600 projects rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, its rear end is located forward of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and is housed inside the first cover member 4202. .

  The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circular shape in accordance with the cylindrical positioning portion 4600. In addition, the substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the positioning portion 4600. The positioning portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The positioning portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400, and the first display substrate is formed inside the first cover member 4202. 4200 relative positions. Accordingly, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.

  As described above, since the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled while being positioned with respect to each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400, the LED 4045 and the LED 4045 correspond thereto. The window 4206 can be aligned without displacement, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately identified. In addition, since the positioning portion 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 4212 and reinforced by the window defining portion 4212, the positioning portion 4600 may be configured to protrude backward from the window defining portion 4212. Damage or deformation can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 4600 integrally with the window defining portion 4212, the protrusion dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400 so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the first display substrate 4200. More specifically, the first display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched in the left-right (this embodiment), up-down, or oblique direction. A pair of positioning portions 4600 are provided in the first cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the paired substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure by the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 in which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in one area of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100. It is provided dispersedly on both sides of the region.

  In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure between the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 in which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided on both sides of the connector 4100. They are distributed. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached or detached. However, the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the protection member 4204 has a plate shape, and has a connector opening 4300 that penetrates in the front and back directions in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed in accordance with the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passing through the connector opening 4300. The protection member 4204 covers the first display substrate 4200 housed in the first cover member 4202 at least partially so that it is difficult to access the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The cover member 4202 (this embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200 is attached. The protection member 4204 is arranged so as to be fitted inside the first cover member 4202, and is arranged behind the first display substrate 4200 also housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protection member 4204 of the present embodiment has an outer shape that matches the inner area of the first cover member 4202 defined by the horizontal cover portion 4210. When the protection member 4204 is stored in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protection member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protection member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. . Then, when the protection member 4204 is stored in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, a position where the rear surface of the protection member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210 or a front cover portion that is closer than the open end. The protective member 4204 is disposed on the inner side area of the first cover member 4202 while being disposed on the 4208 side (front side).

  As described above, since the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered with the protection member 4204, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the rear, and illegal acts on the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented. Can be prevented. In addition, the presence of the protection member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protection member 4204 is housed in the area inside the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 itself because it is hindered by the first cover member 4202.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled in a fitting structure by unevenness, and after the assembly, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or when disassembled. It is configured such that a trace of removal remains on any of the member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The fitting structure is such that a claw-shaped engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (the protection member 4204 in the present embodiment) is connected to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are fitted into the engagement receiving portion 4216 provided on the other (the first cover member 4202 in the present embodiment), and the engagement between the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 causes the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 to be caught. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, and is distributed to the sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 opposite to each other across the first display substrate 4200. It is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 on the horizontal cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the horizontal cover portion 4210 so as to form a rear opening edge of an engagement opening formed through the horizontal cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 is formed in a recessed shape in which a portion on the front side from the engagement opening is opened outward, is formed with a small thickness, and an engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided over the opening side of the recess. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 has a thickness smaller than the thickness of the horizontal cover portion 4210, is provided so as to be concave on the inside, and the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the protection member 4204 is provided with an engagement portion 4214 projecting from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protection member 4204. The width of the engaging portion 4214 and the width of the engaging receiving portion 4216 (engaging opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness of the engaging portion 4214 in the front-rear direction and the dimension of the engaging opening in the front-rear direction are When the engagement portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the engagement portion 4214 is positioned by hitting the opening edge of the engagement opening. The engagement portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that is inclined rearward as the front surface approaches the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engaging portion 4214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 and the rear surface intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 in a perpendicular or nearly perpendicular relationship. Extending. Thus, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be pushed and spread by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 which is in contact with the engaging receiving portion 4216. The engaging portion 4214 can be easily fitted into the engaging opening over the receiving portion 4216. Then, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted in the engaging opening, the engaging portion 4214 is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the backward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 face each other in a parallel relationship and are caught. The first cover member 4202 is not guided such that the first cover member 4202 is pushed open by the engaging portion 4214 as when the first cover member 4202 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216. Therefore, by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216, the protection member 4204 cannot be substantially removed from the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, according to the fitting structure of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the protection member 4204 is used to attach the first display substrate 4200. By protecting the first display substrate 4200, fraudulent acts can be prevented. Further, when the engaging portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protection member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, a trace of the destruction of the engagement receiving portion 4216 is formed on the first cover member 4202. Remaining traces of the protection member 4204 destroying the engaging portion 4214 remain, which makes it easier to discover that there has been fraud. Further, when the protection member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 is broken, so that the protection member 4204 is attached to the first cover member 4202 again. And it becomes difficult to reassemble.

  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and a trace of removal remains. Accordingly, the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, Reassembly is difficult, and traces of removal are left on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200, and it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts, if any.

  As shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, an identification unit 4220 capable of identifying the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs 4045 as an individual or a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202. . The identification unit 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206 and is provided around the transmission unit 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects light transmitted therethrough. Also has a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that hardly transmits light. In addition, the identification unit 4220 may include a combination area 4226 (FIG. 80) displayed on the shielding unit 4224 and indicating the light emission mode of the two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The identification means 4220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is preferably formed in a shape corresponding to the front surface area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 is opened. In this embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Have been. In the present embodiment, the identification unit 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded, but the size of the identification unit 4220, the method of attaching the identification unit 4220 to the first cover member 4202, and the like are not limited thereto.

  The transmission section 4222 of the present embodiment is located in front of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmitting portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206. The transmitting portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the opening of the window 4206 and the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 from being directly visible from the front side. It is. Here, “influencing light” refers to, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is difficult to visually recognize by making it translucent, a mode in which light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, This embodiment refers to a mode in which light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to be large, a mode in which light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged to make the light emitted from the LED 4045 small, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 4222. The transmitting portion 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with a plurality of windows 4206 provided on the first cover member 4202. 4220. That is, in the identification means 4220, a transmission portion 4222 having a square shape corresponding to the window 4206 is formed in the same size as the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed by the transmission portion 4222.

  As described above, since the front side of the window 4206 is closed by the transparent portion 4222, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. Can be. That is, it is possible to prevent the transmissive portion 4222 from performing an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200 via the window 4206 penetrating to the inside of the first cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily distinguished, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmitting portion 4222, a shielding portion 4224 configured to make light harder to pass than the transmitting portion 4222 covering the window 4206 is provided. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the transmitting portion 4222. In the present embodiment, a portion other than the transmitting portion 4222 is configured in one sheet constituting the identification means 4220. The shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to overlap with a region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is formed of a dark color having a low degree of brightness (absorbing light well), such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength range such as black, a cold color such as dark blue, and the like. Is different.

  In this manner, since the shielding portion 4224 through which light is hardly transmitted is provided around the transmission portion 4222, the transmission portion 4222 can be easily recognized, and the status of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmission portion 4222 is more improved. It becomes easy to determine. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to recognize that the window 4206 is misaligned because the window 4206 is not directly visible. In addition, if the window 4206 is covered with the transmitting portion 4222, the transmitting portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 emits light, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  Note that the shielding portion 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the transmitting portion 4222 is set, but the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 4224, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet via the interposition or the front side of the shielding portion 4224 may be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by a partition mark 4228 including a frame (this embodiment) displayed on the shielding section 4224. The division mark 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmissive portions 4222, so that the combination area 4226 surrounded by the division mark 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability game state indicator 68, the time-saving game state indicator 69, and the right strike In the first display 67, the number-of-rounds display 66, the first ordinary symbol display 62, and the first ordinary symbol holding first display 65, a plurality of these LEDs 4045 (transmissive section 4222) constitute a display. For each of them, a group of transmissive portions 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by a section mark 4228 to form a combination area 4226 corresponding to each display. Note that the section mark 4228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, but may be any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding a character or changing a color in the combination area 4226. .

  As shown in FIG. 80, specifically, the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by surrounding the transparent portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row on the left side with the section mark 4228. I do. The transmissive portions 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row are surrounded by section markers 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed. The transparent portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 disposed between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by the section mark 4228, and the first special symbol reservation second A combination area 4226 corresponding to one display 63 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by a section marker 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol reservation first display 64 is displayed. In addition, a combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed by surrounding the transmission part 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the lower left side of the row with a section mark 4228. A transparent area 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the number-of-rounds display 66 is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal first symbol display 62 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the ordinary symbol holding first display 65 is displayed.

  By displaying the combination area 4226 in this manner, the states of the LEDs 4045 in the area are associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the information based on the combination of the LEDs 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the identification means 4220 is disposed on the first layer 4230 in a region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 so as to easily transmit light, and is arranged on the first layer 4230 so as to overlap the first layer 4230. It is a sheet having a second layer 4232 that transmits less light than 4230. In other words, a portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 4222 is formed only of the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and a portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is formed of the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of a laminated part. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 4232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and prevents light from transmitting from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 4230 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification means 4220 is obtained, for example, by laminating a second layer 4232 on a sheet made of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like. Absent.

  When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 can attach and detach a harness to and from the connector 4100 in a state where the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2, and is easy to use.

  As the first cover member 4202, a front cover portion 4208, a lateral cover portion 4210, a window defining portion 4212, an engagement receiving portion 4216, a positioning portion 4600, and the like are integrally formed of thermoplastic resin or the like. A molded article made of a synthetic resin is used. Further, as the protective member 4204, a molded product in which each part such as the engaging part 4214 is made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin integrally formed is used.

  In addition, the first display substrate 4200 is welded or adhered to the first cover member 4202 while the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202, so that the first display substrate 4200 is attached to the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be mounted in a state where it is difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, or a trace of removal remains.

(Modification of First Game Information Display Device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, differences from the above-described first game information display device 59 will be mainly described, and description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the first game information display device 59 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 2, and the front side is covered by the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board 2, and includes a rear portion including a plate portion that forms the front surface and a wall portion that extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It has a box shape that opens to the side (FIG. 90). Here, the “front and rear area” is an area formed for providing a game area 2 </ b> A through which a game ball passes in front of the plate member of the game board 2. The covering member 4800 is arranged so that the front surface is substantially the same as the front end of the inner rail member 29B or the outer rail member 29C, and is arranged outside the outer rail member 29C (game area 2A) as in the present embodiment. May also serve as a board decoration. In the case where the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 2A, one of the game components installed in the game area 2A such as the first start port 6, the second start port 7 and the special winning opening 8 is provided. The part may be constituted by the covering member 4800.

  The covering member 4800 has a portion that covers the front side of the first game information display device 59 is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 or the like of the first game information display device 59, so that the cover member 4800 has a front side. The state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the plate member of the game board 2 by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 faces the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) with respect to a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) described later provided so as to face the back side. 2 can be accessed from the back side. In this manner, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member with the first game information display device 59 attached thereto, and the covering member 4800 can be attached or detached according to the exchange of the first game information display device 59 or the change of the model. The 4800 can be easily replaced.

  Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is difficult to access from outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, it is possible to save time until the fraud reaches the first display substrate 4200, and it is possible to make fraud more difficult.

  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the cover member 4800 from the plate member, the first game information display device 59 can be easily replaced when it breaks down. Note that the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble with respect to the covering member 4800 by bonding or the like, or any of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 when detached from the covering member 4800. The crab may be attached in a configuration in which traces remain. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 has a structure that is difficult to remove without breaking the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59. (1) A configuration in which the game information display device 59 cannot be reassembled as a result of being destroyed or deformed, and the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 being destroyed or deformed by being removed. 4800 or at least one of the configurations in which a trace of removal remains on the first game information display device 59.

  The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized by the player via the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member), and a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) provided so as to face the back side. It is accessible.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in this modification, current limiting means 4500, 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 101 side. If the first game information display device 59 is configured to be electrically connected to the effect control board 102, the current control means 4500, 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 102. As shown in FIG. 97, by mounting a resistor 4500 as current limiting means on the main control board 101 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045. Has been prevented. The resistor 4500 may be mounted in a through-hole to fix the lead of the resistor 4500 to a hole in a printed circuit board, or may be surface-mounted on the main control board 101. Accordingly, the main control board 101 does not protrude the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit on the side opposite to the surface on which the resistor 4500 is mounted, and the surface opposite to the mounting surface can be effectively used.

  The resistor 4500 may be arranged on the other surface of the main control board 101 opposite to the surface on which the electric component is mounted, at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the electric component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic components may be either completely or partially overlapped with the main control board 101 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control board 101, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 101 can be made more compact by effectively using both surfaces of the main control board 101.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as a driver 5600 on the main control board 101. The current limiting unit 4500 limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less, thereby preventing an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045. In this manner, by providing the current limiting means 4500, 4500 on the main control board 101 side, the resistance of the first display substrate 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Thus, the size of the first game information display device 59 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 94, 95, and 96, when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner area of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is opened at the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner area of the first cover member 4202 at a position (this embodiment) aligned with the (rear end) or at the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) with respect to the open end. You. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, on which the LEDs 4045 are mounted, with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front and peripheral surfaces of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment is configured such that the inner region is formed so as to correspond to a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed while being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the side, and the first display substrate 4200 Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engagement structure in which the alignment portion 4600 is melted and engaged with the first display substrate 4200, and after being assembled. Are configured such that they are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or when disassembled, leaving traces of removal on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted and becomes larger than the substrate hole 4400. As a result, a hooking portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the positioning portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 and the engaging portion 4600a of the positioning portion 4600, and is fixed to the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, according to the engagement structure described above, it is difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected by the first cover member 4202. Unauthorized acts on the 1 display substrate 4200 can be prevented. In addition, when the hook portion 4600a is destroyed and the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, a trace of the breakage of the hook portion 4600a remains on the first cover member 4202, and an illegal act is performed. It is easy to find out that there was. Further, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202 due to the breakage of the locking portion 4600a. , It becomes difficult to reassemble.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, an identification unit 4220 that can identify the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs 4045 as an individual or a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202. . The identification unit 4220 may be an arrangement associated with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as providing only the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or dispersing the first covering member 4202 and the covering member 4800. Further, the identification unit 4220 may have any configuration such as a configuration attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, and a configuration provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800. The identification unit 4220 of the present embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the identification means 4220 includes a third identification section 4802 provided separately from the second identification section 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light. And a shielding portion 5128 as a second region that is provided around and that is less likely to transmit light than the transmitting portion 5126. The first identification portion 5122 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification portion 5122 is preferably formed in a shape corresponding to the front surface area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In the present embodiment, the first identification portion 5122 covers the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. A portion 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 5122, but the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The method of attaching to 4202 is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination region indicating the light emission mode of the two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination.

  The transmission unit 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and can transmit light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is covered by the transmitting portion 5126 on the front side of the window 4206. The transmission portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect transmitted light so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 is not directly visible from the front side. Here, "influencing light" refers to, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by being colored, This embodiment refers to a mode in which light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to appear large, a mode in which light is converged to cause light emitted from the LED 4045 to appear small, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 5126. The transmissive portion 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. The identification unit 5122 is provided. That is, in the first identification unit 5122, the transmission unit 5126 is formed in the same size as the window 4206 in a rectangular shape corresponding to the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed by the transmission unit 5126 without a gap. .

  Since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transmissive portion 5126 in this manner, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. it can. That is, it is possible to prevent the transmissive portion 5126 from performing an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 penetrating to the inside of the first cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmission unit 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily distinguished, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmitting portion 5126, there is provided a shielding portion 5128 which is configured to make light harder to pass than the transmitting portion 5126 which covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding part 5128 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the transmission portion 5126. In the present embodiment, one sheet constituting the first identification portion 5122 constitutes a portion other than the transmission portion 5126. The shielding portion 5128 is arranged on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap a region other than the window 4206, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is formed of a dark color having a low degree of brightness (absorbing light well) such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength range such as black, a cool color such as dark blue, and the like. Is different.

  As described above, since the shielding portion 5128, through which light is difficult to transmit, is provided around the transmission portion 5126, the transmission portion 5126 can be easily recognized, and the status of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmission portion 5126 can be further improved. It becomes easy to determine. Even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to recognize that the window 4206 is misaligned because the window 4206 is not directly visible. In addition, if the window 4206 is covered with the transmitting portion 5126, the transmitting portion 5126 surrounded by the shielding portion 5128 emits light, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  The shielding section 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the transmission section 5126 is set, but the front itself of the front cover section 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding section 5128, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet through or through the shielding portion 5128, may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the first identification unit 5122 is disposed so as to overlap with the first layer 5130, which is easy to transmit light, and on the first cover member 4202 in front of the area other than the window 4206, and It is a sheet having a second layer 5131 that transmits less light than the first layer 5130. In other words, a portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 5126 is formed only of the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and a portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is formed of the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of a laminated part. Since the laminated portion includes the second layer 5131, light is difficult to transmit in the laminating direction (thickness direction), and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5130 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained, for example, by laminating a second layer 5131 on a sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting or printing, and has such a size as to be visible between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There are no steps.

  By configuring the first identification unit 5122 in this manner, even if the window 4206 and the transmission unit 5126 are misaligned, light can be guided to the transmission unit 5126 by the first layer 5130, and the shielding unit 5128 can be provided. Since the transmitting portion 5126 surrounded by the LED lights up, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. Moreover, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmission portion 5126 can be clearly distinguished.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second identification unit 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light transmitting unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and around the light transmitting unit 5132. A light-shielding portion 5134 is provided as a second region that transmits light more easily than the light-transmitting portion 5132. In addition, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 displayed on the light blocking unit 5134 and indicating a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs 4045. The second identification unit 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape, and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 5124. However, the size of the second identification portion 5124, a method of attaching the second identification portion 5124 to the covering member 4800, and the like. Not limited to this.

  The light transmitting portion 5132 of this modification is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted or affects the light transmitted therethrough. It has become. The light transmitting portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206 by the light transmitting portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of this embodiment is configured to be transparent and is formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 4206. The light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light, similarly to the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identification unit 5122. By adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light transmitting unit 5132, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily identified.

  Around the light transmitting portion 5132, there is provided a light shielding portion 5134 that is configured so that light hardly passes through than the light transmitting portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the light blocking portion 5134 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The light-shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the light-transmitting portion 5132. In the present embodiment, one sheet constituting the second identification portion 5124 constitutes a portion other than the light-transmitting portion 5132. The light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to overlap a region other than the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The light-shielding portion 5134 is formed of a dark color having a low degree of brightness (it absorbs light well), such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, a cool color such as dark blue, or the like. Is different.

  As described above, since the light-shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132, the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily recognized, and the LED 4045 recognized through the light-transmitting portion 5132 The situation becomes easier to determine. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it is difficult to recognize that the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned.

  The light-shielding portion 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the light-transmitting portion 5132 is set. Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding unit 5134 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet via the or the front side of the light shielding unit 5134 may be adopted. An opening may be provided in the covering member 4800 corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be closed by the second identification unit 5124 (the light transmitting unit 5132 and / or the light shielding unit 5134).

  The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition mark 4806 including a frame (the present embodiment) displayed on the light shielding unit 5134. The division mark 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light transmitting portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division mark 4806 can be distinguished and recognized from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability gaming state indicator 68, the time-saving gaming state indicator 69, and the right-handed In the first display 67, the number-of-rounds display 66, the first ordinary symbol display 62, and the first ordinary symbol holding display 65, among these, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (the transmission unit 5126 or the light transmission unit 5132) are used. Regarding the constituents of the display device, a group of the LEDs 4045 (the transmissive portion 5126 or the light transmitting portion 5132) corresponding to the display device is surrounded by the division mark 4806, and a combination area 4804 corresponding to each display device is formed. Note that the division mark 4806 is not limited to the form of the frame line, but may be any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding a character or changing the color in the combination area 4804. .

  Specifically, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by surrounding it with the section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the upper row left side. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by surrounding it with the section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. The first special symbol holding first display is surrounded by a section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the box 63 is displayed. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol reservation first display 64 is displayed by surrounding it with a section marker 4806 so as to correspond to the two right LEDs 4045 of the second special symbol first display 61. Also, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed by surrounding it with the section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by surrounding it with the section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed by surrounding it with the section mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row.

  By displaying the combination area 4804 in this manner, the states of the LEDs 4045 in the area are associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the information based on the combination of the LEDs 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the second identification unit 5124 is disposed on the front side of the first layer 5136, except for the first layer 5136, which easily transmits light, and the region corresponding to the window 4206. It is a sheet having a second layer 5138 that transmits less light than 5136. In other words, the light-transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 includes only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the light-shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light includes the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. And a lamination part. Since the laminated portion includes the second layer 5138, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and prevents light from transmitting from the light shielding portion 5134. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5136 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet including the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like. There is no step.

  The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification portion 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is arranged on the front surface of the covering member 4800 at a position different from the second identification portion 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment). The third identification section 4802 makes the displayed information visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other with the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802. However, the size of the third identification portion 4802, a method of attaching the third identification portion 4802 to the covering member 4800, and the like are different. Not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122, or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 4220, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. .

  By providing the third identification section 4802 in this manner, the information that can be displayed increases, and the information displayed on the first game information display device 59 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing the information for each information and distributing and displaying the information to the plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124, it is possible to flexibly cope with a change such as a model change.

  The identification sections 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured so that the peripheral surface thereof is covered with a protection section 4808 (FIG. 90). In the present embodiment, a protection portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the peripheral surface of the second identification portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identification portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each of the peripheral surfaces of the 4802 is covered with a protection portion 4808. Specifically, the protection portion 4808 is formed of a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a concave portion formed according to the shape of the identification portion 4802, 5124 corresponding to the mounting position of the identification portion 4802, 5124. I have. The concave portion of the covering member 4800 has a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the identification portion 4802, 5124. The protection portion 4808 faces the peripheral surface of the identification portion 4802, 5124 fitted and attached to the concave portion. The entire periphery of 4802, 5124 is surrounded by a protection unit 4808.

  By covering the peripheral surfaces of the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808 in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to access the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808. 4802, 5124 can be prevented from being removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized act such as replacing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the first display substrate 4200. Further, by attaching the identification portions 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 based on the protection portion 4808, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 can be aligned. In particular, since the second identification portion 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without displacement, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.

  In this modification, the protection unit 4808 is provided along the entire circumference of the identification units 4802 and 5124. However, the protection unit 4808 is provided on a part of the peripheral surface of the identification units 4802, 5122 and 5124 (identification unit 4220). A configuration may be provided correspondingly.

  As the information displayed by the identification means 4220, information related to a profit provided to the player in the game (may be referred to as game state information in the description), which is displayed by the first game information display device 59, is supplemented or explained. Such as game state display, unique display indicating unique information such as model name, probability of gaming machine 1 (for example, 1/299, etc.), probable change rate of gaming machine 1 (for example, 60/100, etc.), and big hit The specification display indicating the specification information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R, etc.) may be displayed alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described in a printing or other method that can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the section mark 4806, the state of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 is associated and recognized as a combination, A configuration may be employed in which game state information displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 4045 is easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 91 is an illustration showing an example of a game state display 4810 applied corresponding to the round number display 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the game state display 4810 includes a number of rounds at a position that is known to correspond to the round number display 66, such as a position corresponding to the side of the round number display 66. A configuration in which the display mode of the LED 4045 and the number of rounds in each round are described with a pattern that schematically represents the display 66. The game state display 4810 in FIG. 91A describes the game state information (round number) displayed by a combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game state display 4810 in FIG. 91A, the game state information (the number of rounds) indicated by the round number display 66 can be easily identified.

  Also, as the game state display 4810, a sign such as a number or a symbol is arranged at a position corresponding to the LED 4045 (FIG. 91 (b)) or a position corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 (FIG. 91 (c)). The indicator may be configured to assist in associating and recognizing the state of the LED 4045 as a combination, or to describe the state of the LED 4045. Note that the sign may be a difference in color or shape.

  The identification unit 4220 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided on the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identification unit 4220 can be assigned to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of each identification unit 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. In addition, by assigning and setting the functions required for the identification unit 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. In addition, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 in an overlapping manner, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

  Since the covering member 4800 is exchangeably attached to the game board 2, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 2 and replaced when the model is changed, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 are replaced. Can be easily replaced, including. With a configuration in which the unique display and the specification display are performed by the covering member 4800, it is possible to cope with another model by exchanging the covering member 4800. In addition, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of the structure of the second game information display device 79)
As shown in FIG. 99, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second indicators 88 and 89, the first and second special symbol holding second indicators 83 and 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, and the normal symbol holding second display. The device 85 constitutes a right-handed second display 87.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the second game information display device 79 covers at least a second display substrate 5800 having ten LEDs mounted on the surface and a front side of the second display substrate 5800. It is composed of a second cover member 5710 and the like. Although not shown here, an identification means capable of identifying the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs as individual or a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs is arranged on the front side (top) of the second cover member 5710. .

  The second cover member 5710 includes a plate-shaped pedestal portion 5730 that forms the bottom of the second cover member 5710, and a triangular prism-shaped protrusion 5720 protruding from the pedestal portion 5730. The corner of the side surface of the protrusion 5720 is chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protrusion 5720 facing the player.

  The second display substrate 5800 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs on a front surface facing a player, and can emit light from each LED toward the front. The LED is surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, not through-hole mounting for fixing the LED lead to a hole in the printed circuit board. In the second display substrate 5800, the LED light emitting element and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display substrate 5800 are located on the same front surface of the second display substrate 5800. That is, in the second display substrate 5800, the leads for connecting the LEDs to the circuits do not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LEDs is not disposed on the rear surface. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED, any type such as a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but a chip type is preferable because of the advantage that the space can be reduced. Under the control of the control means of the effect control board 102, the second display board 5800 controls the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and the like of the plurality of LEDs, and turns on, turns off, blinks, and the like, and combinations and states thereof. Information on the profit given to the player due to a change or the like is displayed.

  As described above, by mounting the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800, the arrangement space of the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800 can be reduced, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact. it can. In addition, by mounting the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800, the weight can be reduced and the number of failures can be reduced. In addition, since the LEDs are surface-mounted on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800, the mounting of the LEDs does not affect the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 unlike through-hole mounting. Therefore, on the second display substrate 5800, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 can be effectively used. The second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.

  The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800 or a configuration in which the LED is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in a front area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or hardly reflects light such as black in the front area. An absorbing section may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, light emitted from the LED is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be used efficiently. In the case where the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. Can be prevented.

  The projecting portion 5720 is formed with ten light guide holes 5740 as windows penetrating the projecting portion 5720 along the projecting direction. The second display substrate 5800 is attached to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 while covering the surface thereof, and each light guide hole 5740 is mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800 by surface mounting. Is arranged at a position corresponding to the LED. This makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 through the light guide hole 5740.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the second display substrate 5800, a connector 5810 wired to an LED surface-mounted on the front surface is provided (see FIG. 100). Are connected.

  Then, the second display substrate 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display substrate 5800 is detachable and reassembled with the second cover member 5710. Possible and when disassembled, it is attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving any trace.

  Note that the method of attaching the second display substrate 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (the pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this. The second cover member 5710 may be detachable, reassembled, or attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving any trace when disassembled.

  Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to a triangular prism shape, but may be various shapes such as a columnar shape and a quadrangular prism shape. In the present embodiment, as an example, ten LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, and ten light guide holes corresponding to each LED are provided on the second cover member 5710. Although 5740 is formed, the invention is not limited to this, and one or a plurality of LEDs and a light guide hole may be provided.

  Further, the second game information display device 79 may be divided into a plurality of display devices according to functions, and in that case, the second game information display device 79 is arranged adjacent to the inner rail member 29B at the lower left of the game area 2A. May be arranged, or may be dispersedly arranged at a plurality of places in the game area 2A.

  When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 88 and the first special symbol reservation second display 89 are formed as one display device, The special symbol second display 81 and the second special symbol reservation second display 84 are one display device, the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol reservation second display are one display device, and the right-handed The two displays may be one display device.

  In addition, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, and the ordinary symbol second display 82 are made into one display device, and the first special symbol reservation second display 83, the second special symbol The symbol holding second display 84 and the ordinary symbol holding second display 85 may be one display device, and the right-handed second display may be one display device.

  Also, the first special symbol second display 88, the second special symbol second display 89, and the ordinary symbol second display 82 are one display device, and the first special symbol reservation second display 83 is one display. The second special symbol reservation second display 84 may be one display device, and the normal symbol reservation second display 85 and the right-handed second display may be one display device.

(Frequency of production buttons and production levers)
Next, the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selected in the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, and an example of distribution in which the effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is selected.

More specifically, FIG. 101 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability game state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 101 (A-2) is a low-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of. FIG. 101 (B-1) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability game state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 101 (B-2) is an example of a high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. FIG.
The low-probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-1) and the high-probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-1) are stored in the main ROM 101b. The low-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-2) and the high probability game state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-2) are stored in the sub-ROM 102b. .

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A-1), in the case of a loss in a jackpot lottery in a low-probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “01” or “02” is selected at a ratio of “80:20”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern “03” or “04” is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A-2), when the variation pattern “01” (losing) is selected, an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of “100: 0”, that is, Only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. When the variation pattern “02” (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of “80:20” is selected.

  Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” (hit) is selected, an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “80:20”, and the fluctuation pattern “04” (hit) is selected. In this case, the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “70:30”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-1), in the case of a loss in a jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern “07” or “08” is selected at a ratio of “50:50”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-2), when the fluctuation pattern “05” (loss) is selected, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at the ratio of “80:20” is selected. Is done. When the variation pattern “06” (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of “60:40” is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern “07” (hit) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the variation pattern “08” (hit) is selected. In this case, an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

  Thus, in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). Has become. In the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to be selected than an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is more easily selected than in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). I have.
Therefore, in the low-probability game state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability game state, and the effect using the effect button 18A can enhance the interest. Further, in the low-probability gaming state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, and the characteristic effect in the low-probability gaming state can enhance interest. Further, in the high-probability gaming state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is more likely to occur than in the low-probability gaming state, and the effect using the effect lever 19A can enhance interest, and the effect lever 19A can be used. Since the produced effect is a characteristic effect in the high-probability gaming state, the interest can be particularly enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected in the low-probability game state than in the high-probability game state. The effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be easily selected. Further, in the low-probability gaming state, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, but the effect lever is more effective than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. The effect prompting the operation of 19A may be easily selected.

  In the present embodiment, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is more easily selected in the high-probability gaming state than in the low-probability gaming state. The effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be easily selected.

  Furthermore, in the low-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected, and in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Furthermore, in the low-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected, and in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, but the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(The effect change mode when the effect button effect is selected)
Next, a description will be given of a change in the effect mode of the effect button 18A when the effect by the effect button 18A is selected.

FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect button effect change mode determination table. FIG. 102 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect button effect change mode determination table for a low-probability game state, and FIG. 102 (B) is an example of an effect button effect change mode determination table for a high-probability game state. FIG.
The low probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (A) and the high probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stored in the sub-ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the low probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. The high-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the high-probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when the fluctuation pattern “01” (losing) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “no protruding” at a ratio of “100: 0” Or, "with protrusion", that is, only "without protrusion" is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “02” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without projection” or “with projection” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “03” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. Further, when the variation pattern “04” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
Note that “without projection” is an effect in which the effect ends with the effect button 18A in a normal state (the state of FIG. 72A), and “with protrusion” means that the effect button 18A is in a protruding state (in FIG. 72A). FIG. 72 (b) shows an effect that changes during the effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the fluctuation pattern “05” (loss) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the “protrusion” is performed at a ratio of “100: 0”. "No" or "with protrusion", that is, only "without protrusion" is selected. When the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without projection” or “with projection” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (hit) is selected and the effect using the effect button 18A is selected, “no projection” or “projection” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. Further, when the variation pattern “08” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  Thus, at the time of winning, the effect of projecting the effect button 18A is easily executed (see FIG. 102). As described above, in the low-probability game state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect related to the effect button 18A is selected more than in the high-probability game state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). It is easier. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state, the effect related to the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability gaming state, and at the time of winning, the effect effect of the effect button 18A is easily executed, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be.

(Direction change mode when the stage lever effect is selected)
Next, a description will be given of a change in the effect mode of the effect lever 19A when the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected.

FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect lever effect change mode determination table. FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table, and FIG. 103 (B) is an example of a high-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table. FIG.
The low-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103A and the high-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103B are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect relating to the effect lever 19A is selected in the low-probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. The high-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected in the high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the fluctuation pattern “01” (losing) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” at a ratio of “100: 0” Alternatively, “with vibration”, that is, only “without vibration” is selected. When the fluctuation pattern “02” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “no vibration” or “vibration” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “03” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. When the fluctuation pattern “04” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “no vibration” or “vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
Note that “no vibration” is an effect in which the effect ends with the effect lever 19A in a normal state (non-vibrating state), and “with vibration” means that the effect is effected while the effect lever 19A vibrates. It is a changing production.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the fluctuation pattern “05” (losing) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the “vibration” is performed at a ratio of “100: 0”. "No vibration" or "with vibration", that is, only "no vibration" is selected. When the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “no vibration” or “vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. When the variation pattern “08” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  Thus, at the time of winning, the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is easily executed (see FIG. 103). As described above, in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect relating to the effect lever 19A is selected more than in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). It is easier. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect related to the effect lever 19A is more likely to occur than in the low-probability gaming state, and at the time of winning, the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is more easily executed. Can be.

(The appearance frequency of the production button in the high-probability game state, the operation promotion effect of the production lever (the production button <the production lever), and the production change mode when the production lever production is selected)
Next, a description will be given of an effect in a case where the appearance frequency of the operation promoting effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the high-probability gaming state is different from the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 104 is a fluctuation pattern determination table or the like in the high-probability gaming state. Specifically, FIG. 104 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability game state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 104 (A-2) is a high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table.
The high-probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 104 (A-1) is stored in the main ROM 101b. The high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 104 (A-2) and the high-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 104 (B) are stored in the sub-ROM 102b. .

  As shown in FIG. 104 (A-1), in the case of a loss in a jackpot lottery in a high-probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern “07” or “08” is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A-2), when the fluctuation pattern “05” (loss) is selected, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at the ratio of “40:60” is selected. Is done. When the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of “30:70” is selected.

  Further, when the variation pattern “07” (hit) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the variation pattern “08” (hit) is selected. In this case, an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), when the fluctuation pattern “05” (loss) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the “vibration” is performed at a ratio of “100: 0”. "No vibration" or "with vibration", that is, only "no vibration" is selected. When the fluctuation pattern “06” (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the fluctuation pattern “no vibration” or “vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern “07” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. When the variation pattern “08” (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  Thus, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is more likely to be selected than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A (see FIG. 104 (A-2)). Since the vibration effect of the lever 19A is easily executed (see FIG. 104B), the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 18A is more easily selected than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. However, the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be more easily selected than the effect. Furthermore, in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Further, in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, but the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Production that can operate multiple operation units (production button and production lever))
Next, a description will be given of a case where the operation of not only the effect lever 19A but also the effect button 18A is effective during the lever promotion operation effect of the effect lever 19A.

FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable effect determination table or the like that enables the operation of a plurality of operation units (the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A).
Specifically, FIG. 105 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability game state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 105 (A-2) is a high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation validity period of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 when the variable effect pattern in which the operation of the plurality of operation units (the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A) is valid is selected.

  In the following, a description will be given of a case where a winning in the jackpot lottery in the high-probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “07” is selected, and an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the sub CPU 102 a selects the variable effect pattern in which the operations of the plurality of operation units are valid, first, all the three decorative symbols are changed with respect to the image display device 14. By displaying the effect image as if it were, a variable effect is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the sub CPU 102a temporarily stops and displays the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol with the symbol indicating the same number, and reaches only the central decorative symbol. The effect is displayed on the image display device 14.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the sub CPU 102a causes the central decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a number different from the numbers of the left and right decorative symbols. Then, in this state, the sub CPU 102a waits until a time that can be recognized by the player elapses.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A as a gimmick, for example, and causes the first decorative member 17A to appear on the front surface of the image display device 14. The sub CPU 102a changes the display of the decorative pattern from substantially the center to the upper right, reduces the display range, and displays the display in a reach effect state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102a retracts the first decorative member 17A from the front surface of the image display device 14 (for example, returns it to the initial position) as shown in FIG. A lever promotion operation effect for operating is performed over a predetermined effective period. At this time, the sub CPU 102a illuminates in order to easily recognize that the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A can be operated. In addition, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A in a protruding state in order to easily operate the effect button 18A. It is not necessary to dare to make the effect button 18A illuminate or make it protrude.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the sub CPU 102a activates both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A simultaneously with the start of the lever promotion operation effect. The operation of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A is effective while the lever promoting operation effect is being performed. When the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the lever promotion operation effect ends, and the operation validity period of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A ends. If neither the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the operation of the effect button 18A is detected within the operation effective period, the operation of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A become invalid at the end of the operation effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), when the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating a lottery result.

  As described above, the operation of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A becomes effective even if the lever promotion operation effect for operating the effect lever 19A is not performed on the image display device 14, so that the player Can play a game using the easy-to-operate operation part of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A, and can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, two operation units, that is, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more operation units may be used.

(First Specific Example of State Transition, and Sixth Specific Example of Variation Pattern and Distribution of Operating Means Related to Variation Pattern)
Next, a first specific example relating to the state transition and a sixth specific example of the distribution of the operation means relating to the fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 107, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 107 (B-1) has been determined.

  First, FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram illustrating transition of the effect (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. More specifically, the effect symbol starts changing, "change starts", the effect symbol starts changing, and "before reach" is performed before reach is performed, and "after reach" is performed after the reach is formed. And “evolved reach” performed after the “after reach”. In the reach performed during the “after reach” period, a reach having a relatively low degree of expectation with respect to the jackpot is executed. For example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped. After that, a transition is made to the reach performed during the “development reach” period. Note that the reach that is performed during the “development reach” period (for example, “special reach”) has a relatively higher expectation for the jackpot than the reach that is performed during the “after reach” period (for example, “super reach”) High reach is implemented. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, since there is also a pattern that stops the loss in the reach performed in the period of "after reach" and ends the variation without transitioning to "development reach", For example, when the symbol indicating the loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, then the state transitions to “development reach”, or the temporary stop is changed to a definite stop and fluctuates without transitioning to “development reach”. Is to be noticed by the player as to whether the game is over.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image imitating the effect button 18A and displays an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) At "before reach" after "change start". I do. The effect control board 102 sets an operation validity period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. When the “operation validity period” is set, when the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, the operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. When the "operation validity period" is not set, even if the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, no operation information is input to the effect control board 102. It is also assumed that the operation validity period is set to be equal to or longer than the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. When the effect button 18A is operated during the operation validity period, for example, a notice image or the like for notifying that a reach is formed is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect is displayed in which a character image is displayed to notify the possibility that a reach may be formed based on the type of the character, the words of the character, and the like. In addition, such an effect may not be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, or when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, The information may be automatically displayed when the operation validity period elapses. Before the reach, an image simulating the effect button 18A is displayed, and in addition to an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!), An image simulating the effect lever 19A is displayed. An image prompting the operation of the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2).

  Then, in the image display device 14, a reach is formed after displaying an image or the like prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in "before reach". Here, in the example of FIG. 107, in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, a “7” symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (left), and a “7” symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (right). And the effect symbol display area (middle) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a “reach!” Image indicating that the reach has been formed is displayed.

  Then, in the image display device 14, after the reach is formed, in “after reach”, for example, an effect corresponding to “super reach” is executed, and the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than “super reach”. An effect that inspires whether or not to transition to “special reach” is performed. In the “super reach”, the symbol of the loss may be temporarily stopped, and thereafter, a transition may be made to “special reach”, or the “special reach” may be temporarily stopped without temporarily stopping the symbol of the loss. It may be configured to transition to “reach”.

  Then, in the image display device 14, in the "evolved reach" of "after reach", for example, an effect corresponding to "special reach" is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If a loss has been determined, a symbol indicating a loss is derived. In deriving either the jackpot or the losing symbol, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation validity period is set to be equal to or longer than the display time of the image simulating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. In other words, in deriving any of the symbols, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed, and the player operates the effect lever 19A, as if the player operates the effect lever 19A. By performing the operation, an effect such that either the symbol of the jackpot or the loss is derived is performed. In addition, it is assumed that the derivation of either the jackpot or the losing symbol is automatically displayed when the operation lever 19A is not operated during the operation valid period when the operation valid period elapses. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 18A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!), An image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed. An image prompting the operation of the button 18A (press the button!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 107, a symbol “777” indicating a jackpot is derived, and an image indicating that the jackpot has been reached (big hit !!) is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-1) is a diagram showing a relationship between a variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern), content corresponding to the variation pattern (effect content), and distribution of the variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state. is there. Note that FIG. 107 (B-1) illustrates a part of the variation pattern for convenience of description, and includes a plurality of variation patterns in addition to the variation pattern. The “variation pattern 01 (loss)” is a variation pattern that is selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the effect content that transitions from “normal reach” to “super reach” is determined. Have been. “Variation pattern 02 (losing)” is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the effect is determined by the effect content that transitions from “normal reach” to “special reach”. Have been. When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the distribution in which “variation pattern 01 (loss)” is selected is “80/100”, and the distribution in which “variation pattern 02 (loss)” is selected is “20/100”, and the selection ratio of “variation pattern 01 (loss)” is high. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value. The “variation pattern 03 (hit)” is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, and the effect is determined by the effect content that transits from “normal reach” to “super reach”. Have been. “Variation pattern 04 (hit)” is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, and the content transits from “normal reach” to “super reach”, and further includes “ The production contents to transition from "Super Reach" to "Special Reach" are defined. When the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the distribution in which “variation pattern 03 (hit)” is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution in which “variation pattern 04 (hit)” is selected is "50/100", and the selection ratio is equal. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in “before reach” corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low-probability gaming state and the operation of the effect lever 19A. The relationship between the ratio of executing the effect, and the ratio between the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A after the reach and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in "before reach" is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed is determined. It can be said that the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A after the reach is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed.

  In the case of “before reach” of the “variation pattern 01 (losing)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. The effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, in the “before reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “10/100”. 100 ". In the case of “before reach” of the “variation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. 100 ", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. In the case of “before reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “10/100”. 100 ". In other words, it can be said that the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than the effect lever 19A is selected as the whole of the fluctuation pattern before "reach". It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  On the other hand, in the case of “after reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “10/100”. 100 ". Also, in the “after reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100 / 100 ", and the effect button 18A is not selected. In the case of “after reach” of the “variation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “50/100”. 100 ". In the case of “after reach” of the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100 / 100 ". In other words, after "reach", it can be said that the ratio of selecting the effect lever 19A is higher than the effect button 18A is selected as the entire variation pattern. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the “before reach”, the ratio of selection of the effect button 18A is made higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided. In addition, when an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation is either an effect that prompts the operation of one of the operation means or not executed, but any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when performing the effect which prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operation units are provided, the player can also operate the operation unit that he / she wants to operate, so that a further improvement in the game entertainment can be achieved.

  In the first specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 107, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A “before reach” after “change start” is displayed and the “operation validity period” is set, but at the timing of “change start”, the effect button An image prompting the operation of 18A may be displayed, and the “operation validity period” may be set. Further, in the “development reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and by causing the player to operate the effect lever 19A, as if the player operated the effect lever 19A, a big hit or a losing occurs. Although an effect in which one of the symbols is derived is performed, the timing of performing the effect may be any timing as long as it is between "reach" and the timing of deriving the symbol. Further, the image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may simply display only the image of the operation means, and do not need to display the message image. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed, and an image in which the gauge image is changed in accordance with the operation validity period may be displayed. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operation means can be operated is displayed.

(Second Specific Example of State Transition, and Seventh Specific Example of Variation Pattern and Distribution of Operating Means Related to Variation Pattern)
Next, a second specific example relating to the state transition and a seventh specific example of the distribution of the operation means relating to the fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 108, description will be made assuming that “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) has been determined.

  First, FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram illustrating transition of the effect (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the “start of change” in which the effect symbol starts to change, “after reach (first reach)” after the reach is formed, and “development reach (first 2 reach) ". In the reach performed during the “after reach” period, a reach having a relatively low degree of expectation with respect to the jackpot is executed. For example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped. After that, a transition is made to the reach performed during the “development reach” period. Note that the reach that is performed during the “development reach” period (for example, “special reach”) has a relatively higher expectation for the jackpot than the reach that is performed during the “after reach” period (for example, “super reach”) High reach is implemented. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, since there is also a pattern that stops the loss in the reach performed in the period of "after reach" and ends the variation without transitioning to "development reach", For example, when the symbol indicating the loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, then the state transitions to “development reach”, or the temporary stop is changed to a definite stop and fluctuates without transitioning to “development reach”. Is to be noticed by the player as to whether the game is over.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image simulating the effect button 18A and displays an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) At "after reaching" after the reach is formed. The effect control board 102 sets an operation validity period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. Note that the operation validity period is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set to the same time as the display time of the image simulating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or longer than that. It is assumed that it is set. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation validity period, for example, a notice image or the like for announcing the possibility of transition to the development reach is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect is performed in which a character image is displayed to notify the possibility of transition to the advanced reach depending on the type of the character, the character dialogue, and the like. In addition, such an effect may not be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, or when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, The information may be automatically displayed when the operation validity period elapses. After the reach, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed in addition to the image (press the button!) For prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. An image prompting the operation of the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2).

  Note that, in the “after reach” mode, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be displayed after temporarily stopping the lost pattern. For example, when it is determined that a transition to the development reach is made, in the “after reach”, after temporarily stopping the symbol of the loss, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is displayed. When operated, the first decorative member 17A may be operated to transition to the advanced reach.

  Then, in the image display device 14, in the "development reach", for example, an effect corresponding to "special reach" is executed, and if a jackpot has been determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is derived, and the loss is determined. If so, a symbol indicating a loss is derived. In deriving any of these symbols, an image simulating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation validity period is set to be equal to or longer than the display time of the image simulating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. In other words, in deriving either the jackpot or the losing symbol, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed, and the player is operated by operating the effect lever 19A. By operating the effect lever 19A, an effect such that a symbol of either a big hit or a loss is derived is performed. In addition, it is assumed that the derivation of either the jackpot or the losing symbol is automatically displayed when the operation lever 19A is not operated during the operation valid period when the operation valid period elapses. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 18A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!), An image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed. An image prompting the operation of the button 18A (press the button!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 108, a symbol “777” indicating a jackpot is derived, and an image indicating the jackpot (a jackpot !!) is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 108 (B-1) is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 107 (B-1), and thus description thereof is omitted. Next, FIG. 108 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “first reach” corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low-probability game state and the effect lever 19A. The relationship between the rate at which the operation effect is executed and the rate at which the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the "second reach" is executed and the rate at which the operation effect of the effect lever 19A is executed are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "first reach" is displayed and the ratio at which the image urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and the image display device 14, it can be said that the relationship between the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "second reach" is displayed and the rate at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed is shown.

  In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 01 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. And the effect lever 19A is not selected. In the “first reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “10/100”. / 100 ". In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0”. / 100 ”, and the effect lever 19A is not selected. In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “90/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “10/100”. / 100 ". In other words, in the “first reach”, it can be said that the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than the effect lever 19A is selected as the entire variation pattern. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  On the other hand, in the “second reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 01 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “80/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “20”. / 100 ". In the “second reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “10/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “90”. / 100 ”, and the effect button 18A is not selected. In the “second reach” of the “fluctuation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “50”. / 100 ". In the “second reach” of the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100”. / 100 ". In other words, in the "second reach", it can be said that the ratio of selecting the effect lever 19A is higher than the effect button 18A is selected as the entire variation pattern. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the “first reach”, the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and the “second reach” is higher than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided. In addition, when an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation is either an effect that prompts the operation of one of the operation means or not executed, but any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when performing the effect which prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operation units are provided, the player can also operate the operation unit that he / she wants to operate, so that a further improvement in the game entertainment can be achieved.

  In the second specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 108, in the “first reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the “operation validity period” is set. However, if the “first reach” is being performed. The image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the timing for setting the “operation effective period” may be any timing. Also, in the “second reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and by causing the player to operate the effect lever 19A, it is as if the player operated the effect lever 19A, resulting in a big hit or a loss. The effect is such that one of the symbols is derived, but the timing of performing the effect may be any timing as long as the “second reach” is performed. . Further, the image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may simply display only the image of the operation means, and do not need to display the message image. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed, and an image in which the gauge image is changed in accordance with the operation validity period may be displayed. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operation means can be operated is displayed.

(Third Specific Example of State Transition, and Eighth Specific Example of Variation Pattern and Distribution of Operating Means Related to Variation Pattern)
Next, a third specific example relating to the state transition and an eighth specific example of the distribution of the operation means relating to the fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 109, description will be made assuming that “fluctuation pattern 02” and “fluctuation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) have been determined.

  First, FIG. 109 (A) is a diagram illustrating transition of the effect (state transition) displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is composed of "change start" in which the effect symbol starts to change, "reach" in which reach is formed, and "development reach" transiting from "reach". In the reach performed during the “reach” period, a reach having a relatively low degree of expectation for the jackpot is executed. For example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped. After that, a transition is made to the reach performed during the “development reach” period. Note that the reach performed during the “development reach” period (for example, “special reach”) has a relatively higher expectation for the jackpot than the reach performed during the “reach” period (eg, “super reach”) Reach is executed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, since there is also a pattern in which the loss is stopped at the reach performed during the “reach” period and the variation is terminated without transition to the “development reach”, for example, , When the symbol indicating the loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, thereafter, transition to “development reach” is performed, or the temporary stop is changed to a definite stop, and the change is made without transition to “development reach”. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether to end the game.

  Then, in the image display device 14, in the “development reach” after the “reach”, for example, an effect corresponding to “special reach” is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If a loss has been determined, a symbol indicating a loss is derived. In deriving any one of these symbols, an image simulating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the variation pattern, and an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) Is displayed. There is a case where an image simulating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (the lever is pulled!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets, via the lamp control board 104, the operation validity period of the operating means to be operated. The operation validity period is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image simulating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. It is assumed that That is, in deriving either the jackpot or the losing symbol, an image prompting one of the operations is displayed, and the player operates the corresponding operating means, as if the player operated the operating means. As a result, an effect in which either a jackpot or a losing symbol is derived is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “decision effect”). It is assumed that any symbol is derived automatically when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, when the operation valid period elapses. In the example of FIG. 109, an image simulating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (sorry!) Indicating loss is displayed ( "Variation pattern 02"), an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image indicating a big hit (big hit !!) is displayed. A state in which one decorative member 17A is operated is shown (“variation pattern 04”).

  Next, FIG. 109 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, and only partially differs in the distribution, so that the description is omitted. Next, FIG. 109 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the determined effect and the operation effect of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low-probability game state. It shows the relationship with the execution ratio and the relationship between the operation and non-operation of the movable body corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In other words, it can be said that the image display device 14 indicates the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the determined effect. Note that the movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  In the “variation pattern 01 (loss)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. The effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, the movable body remains inactive because of the loss variation pattern. In the “variation pattern 02 (loss)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “70/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “30/100”. I have. In addition, the movable body remains inactive because of the loss variation pattern. In the “variation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “70/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “30/100”. I have. Further, because of the winning variation pattern, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. In the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100/100”. Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. Further, because of the winning variation pattern, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. In other words, in the determined effect, when an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the image urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated, the effect lever 19A is operated. It can be said that the ratio of the movable body that operates is higher. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  Thus, in the determined effect, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and the effect lever 19A is operated, as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. In the case, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means displays an image that prompts an operation in the determined effect. In addition, in the determined effect, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation is either an effect that prompts the operation of one of the operation means or not executed, but any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when performing the effect which prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operation units are provided, the player can also operate the operation unit that he / she wants to operate, so that a further improvement in the game entertainment can be achieved.

  In the third specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 109, an image prompting the operation is displayed between “reach” and “reach” and between “reach” and “development reach”, and the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are operated. Good. Further, in this case, when the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, compared to the case where the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, in the “fixed effect”, the effect of the effect lever 19A is displayed. The ratio at which the image prompting the operation is displayed may be increased. Further, the image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may simply display only the image of the operation means, and do not need to display the message image. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed, and an image in which the gauge image is changed in accordance with the operation validity period may be displayed. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operation means can be operated is displayed.

(Fourth Specific Example of State Transition and Ninth Specific Example of Variation Pattern and Distribution of Operating Means Related to Variation Pattern)
Next, a fourth specific example relating to the state transition and a ninth specific example of the distribution of the operation means relating to the fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 110, description will be made assuming that “fluctuation pattern 01” and “fluctuation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 110 (B-1) have been determined.

  First, FIG. 110 (A) is a diagram illustrating a transition (state transition) of an effect displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the “design start” in which the effect design starts to fluctuate, “reach” in which the reach is formed, “super reach” that transits from “reach”, and “determined effect” performed in “super reach” ". Note that the “determined effect” is the same as in FIG. 109, and a description thereof will not be repeated. In FIG. 110 (A), the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is activated at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach”, and the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is activated. It is composed of the case where it is not allowed to occur. Therefore, the operation and non-operation of the movable body shown in FIG. 110 (B-2) described later are different from FIG. 109 and represent the operation and non-operation at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach” described above. ing. That is, in FIG. 110, as in FIG. 109, the operation of the movable body does not notify the jackpot, but notifies the transition from “reach” to “super reach”. Even if there is, the movable body may operate, and the movable body may not operate even in a variation pattern of the hit. In addition, basically, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set higher when the movable body is operated.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image (development!) Indicating a transition to "super reach" at the timing of transition from "reach" to "super reach" (in addition to the operation of the movable body). And when the movable body does not operate), execute "Super Reach" and determine the jackpot, derive a symbol indicating the jackpot, and determine the loss Derives a symbol indicating a loss. In deriving either the jackpot or the losing symbol, an image simulating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the variation pattern, and an image (press a button!) Prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed. There is a case in which an image simulating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (the lever is pulled!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets, via the lamp control board 104, the operation validity period of the operating means to be operated. The operation validity period is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image simulating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. It is assumed that In other words, in deriving any symbol, an image prompting any operation is displayed, and the player operates the operation means corresponding to the symbol, as if the player operated the operation means. The effect is such that one of the lost symbols is derived (referred to as “decision effect” as in FIG. 109). It is assumed that any symbol is derived automatically when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, when the operation valid period elapses. In the example of FIG. 110, an image simulating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (sorry!) Indicating loss is displayed ( "Variation pattern 01"), an image simulating the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image indicating a big hit (big hit !!) is displayed. A state in which one decorative member 17A is operated is shown (“variation pattern 03”).

  Next, FIG. 110 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 to 109, and only partially differs in the distribution, so that the description is omitted. Next, FIG. 110 (B-2) shows the operation ratio of the effect button 18A and the operation of the effect lever 19A in the “fixed effect” corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low-probability gaming state. It shows the relationship with the ratio of performing the effect, and the relationship between the operation and non-operation of the movable body at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the image display device 14, it can be said that the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the "determined effect" is shown. . Note that the movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  In the “variation pattern 01 (loss)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. The effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, the movable body at the time of the reach transition is inactive. In the “variation pattern 02 (loss)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100/100”. Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. The movable body at the time of the reach transition is in operation. In the “variation pattern 03 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. Thus, the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, the movable body at the time of the reach transition is inactive. In the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100/100”. Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. The movable body at the time of the reach transition is in operation. In other words, in the “determined effect”, when an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated, when an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated. It can be said that the ratio at which the movable body operates at the time of the reach transition is higher. It should be noted that the distribution value can be set to any value.

  As described above, in the “fixed effect”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and when the effect lever 19A is operated, the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is operated. By increasing the rate at which the movable body operates at the time of the reach transition as compared to the case where the reach transition is performed, it is expected that when the movable body operates at the time of the reach transition, the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent “decision effect”. Can be done. In the “determined effect”, when an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation is either an effect that prompts the operation of one of the operation means or not executed, but any operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when performing the effect which prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operation units are provided, the player can also operate the operation unit that he / she wants to operate, so that a further improvement in the game entertainment can be achieved.

  In the fourth specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 110, an image prompting an operation is displayed between “reach” and “reach” and between “reach” and “development reach”, and the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is operated. Good. Also, when transitioning from “reach” to “super reach”, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be operated to operate the movable body. Further, the first decorative member 17A may be configured to be able to be operated in a plurality of stages. For example, assuming that the first decorative member 17A can be operated from the “1” stage to the “3” stage, the “decided effect” is determined according to the operating stage. May indicate whether the operation means operable is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. For example, when it is determined that the production button 18A is operated in the “determined production”, it is easy to select the operation up to the “1” stage, and in the “decision production”, it is possible to operate the production lever 19A. When it is determined, the operation up to the “3” stage may be easily selected. In such a case, at the time of the reach transition, it is possible to predict that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "determined effect" depending on how far the first decorative member 17A operates. Further, a movable body different from the first decorative member 17A is provided, and the “decision effect” is determined depending on whether the first decorative member 17A is operated only, another movable body is operated alone, or both are operated. It may be possible to indicate whether the operation means operable in is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Even with such a configuration, a similar effect can be obtained.

  Further, the image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may simply display only the image of the operation means, and do not need to display the message image. Alternatively, only the meter image may be displayed, and an image in which the gauge image is changed in accordance with the operation validity period may be displayed. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operation means can be operated is displayed.

(Fifth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a fifth specific example related to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 111, description will be made assuming that “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) has been determined. Note that both FIG. 111A and FIG. 111B show the state transition in “variation pattern 03”. Note that the content shown in FIG. 111 is not limited to the “variation pattern 03”, and can be applied to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern in which the effect button 18A is operated in the “operation effective period”). In addition, the contents shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 below can be applied to FIGS. 107 to 110.

  First, in case 1 of FIG. 111 (A), it is assumed that the player has operated the effect lever 19A, for example, when “3S” of the operation validity period set in “determined effect” in “super reach” has elapsed. Represents. That is, the effect symbol starts to change at “change start”, and “reach” is formed after “change”. Then, a transition is made from “reach” to “super reach”, and during the “super reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed on the image display device 14, and the image is displayed and the effect of the effect lever 19A is displayed. “Operation validity period” (for example, “5S”) is set. That is, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 via the image control board 105 during the “super reach”, and the effect control board 102 During "reach", the effect lever 19A is activated via the lamp control board 104. Note that “validation” means that operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104 when the player operates the effect lever 19A. Then, when “3S” has elapsed during “5S” of the “operation validity period”, the player operates the effect lever 19A, and the first decorative member 17A operates on the front side of the image display device 14, The image display device 14 displays an image (big hit !!) indicating that a big hit has occurred. That is, when the effect lever 19A is activated, the effect control board 102 receives the first decorative member via the lamp control board 104 based on the input of the operation information via the lamp control board 104. 17A is operated, and the effect control board 102, based on the input of operation information via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is activated, is controlled by the image control board 105. Is controlled to display an image indicating that a jackpot has been achieved. Note that, for example, in the “fixed effect”, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and when the effect lever 19A is activated, the effect button 18A is activated together with the activation of the effect lever 19A. May be used. In addition, for example, in the “determined effect”, when an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is activated, the effect lever 19A may be activated together with the activation of the effect button 18A.

  Then, after the “operation validity period” has elapsed, the state transits to the “standby period”. The “standby period” includes, for example, a case where the operation is performed during “1S” of the “operation valid period” and a case where the operation is performed during “3S” of the “operation valid period”. Since the operation timing and the display timing of the image indicating the jackpot are different, this is a period in which the time until the “fixed display” described later is performed is adjusted. For example, the length of the “standby period” differs between the case where the operation is performed during “1S” of the “operation valid period” and the case where the operation is performed during “3S” of the “operation valid period”. The “standby period” when the operation is performed in “1S” of the “valid period” is longer. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (B) described later, when the operation is not performed during the “operation valid period”, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the big hit are made after the “operation valid period” elapses. Since the image indicating that the operation has been performed is displayed, the “standby period” after the “operation valid period” elapses becomes shorter than when the operation is performed during the “operation valid period”. In the "standby period", the image display device 14 displays a fluctuation display of the effect symbol (for example, "777"), and displays an image or the like indicating that a big hit has occurred. Therefore, the effect pattern (for example, “777”) displayed on the image display device 14 varies depending on whether the operation is performed during the “operation valid period” and when the operation is not performed during the “operation valid period”. The period during which the variable display is performed is different from the period during which an image or the like indicating that a jackpot has been displayed. When an operation is performed during the “operation valid period”, a predetermined effect is performed during the “standby period”. When no operation is performed during the “operation valid period”, a predetermined effect is performed during the “standby period”. It may not be necessary. Further, after the "standby period", a "return period" of the effect symbol is provided, and as a predetermined effect in the "standby period", an effect of notifying the promotion expectation degree of the effect symbol in the "return period" is performed. Is also good. Here, the “re-fluctuation period” refers to, for example, when the probability change jackpot is determined, a “444” symbol or the like that does not correspond to the probability change jackpot is once displayed in the effect design, and the “444” symbol is changed from the “444” symbol. This is a period in which an effect of whether or not to be promoted to the “777” symbol corresponding to the jackpot is performed. In this way, by providing a “re-change period” after the “stand-by period” and performing an effect of notifying the expected degree of promotion of the effect symbol in the “re-change period” as a predetermined effect in the “stand-by period”, the “operation” In the "effective period", the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. After the "standby period" has elapsed, the display becomes "confirmed display", and the effect symbol "777" changes from a swing fluctuation display to a completely stopped display.

  Next, case 2 of FIG. 111 (B) is different from case 1 of FIG. 111 (A) in the notification mode that the player did not operate the effect lever 19A in the “operation effective period”. , And other points are common. That is, in FIG. 111 (B), similarly to FIG. 111 (A), an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed on the image display device 14, and the "operation effective period" of the effect lever 19A is displayed together with the display of the image. Indicates that the player did not operate the effect lever 19A. In this case, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the display of the image indicating that the big hit has occurred are performed with the elapse of the “operation valid period”, and the operation is performed during the “operation valid period”. Although the operation timing of the first decorative member 17A and the display timing of the image indicating the jackpot are different from those of the first embodiment, the notification mode of the jackpot is the same as that when the operation is performed during the “operation effective period”. . However, if the player does not operate the effect lever 19A during the “operation validity period”, the “standby period” is shortened as described above, so that the predetermined effect in the “standby period” is not executed. It has become. Therefore, in both case 1 of FIG. 111 (A) and case 2 of FIG. 111 (B), the effect contents are based on the “fluctuation pattern 03”. Are common, but the effect in the “standby period” after the lapse of the “operation validity period” is different between when the operation is performed during the “operation validity period” and when the operation is not performed during the “operation validity period”. Departments are different.

(Sixth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a sixth specific example related to state transition will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 112, description will be made assuming that “variation pattern 01” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) has been determined. Note that both FIG. 112 (C) and FIG. 112 (D) show the state transition in “fluctuation pattern 01”. The content shown in FIG. 112 is not limited to “variation pattern 01”, and can be applied to other variation patterns (for example, variation patterns for operating the effect button 18A in the “operation effective period”). Further, FIG. 112 differs from FIG. 111 in whether it is a big hit or a loss, and the other points are common, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  That is, in FIG. 112 (C), when “3S” in the “operation effective period” has elapsed, the effect lever 19A has been operated, but the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the display of the image indicating that the big hit has occurred are performed. Instead, an image (sorry!) Indicating that the game has been lost is displayed. Also, in FIG. 112 (D), since no operation was performed during the “operation valid period”, an image (sorry!) Indicating loss was displayed after the “operation valid period” elapses. I have. Then, after a “standby period”, the “fixed display” of the effect symbol “767” is performed. In the case of FIG. 112, as a predetermined effect in the “standby period”, an effect of notifying the possibility of a reverse big hit may be performed. Here, the “reversal jackpot” means that when the jackpot is determined in advance, after the “standby period” and before the “fixed display”, it is changed from the display mode indicating the loss to the display mode indicating the jackpot. It is. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the "operation validity period" as in FIG.

(Seventh specific example related to state transition)
Next, a seventh specific example related to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example of the predetermined effect performed in the “standby period” in FIG. 111 (A), and therefore only the points different from FIG. 111 (A) will be described.

  That is, in FIG. 113 (E), when “3S” has elapsed in the “operation validity period”, the effect lever 19A is operated, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the display of the image indicating that the big hit has occurred are displayed, and the predetermined lever is displayed. (A character image that is displayed only when the jackpot has been determined) is displayed. Note that the predetermined premier character image can be displayed only for the “operation valid period”, can be continuously displayed from the “operation valid period” to the “standby period”, and becomes the “standby period”. The display can be started later. As described above, by displaying the predetermined premier character image only when the operation is performed during the “operation valid period”, the player is willing to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the “operation valid period”. Can be aroused. In addition, such a predetermined premier character image may be displayed with a probability of, for example, “「 ”when an operation is performed in the“ operation valid period ”, or may be displayed in the“ operation valid period ”. When an operation is performed, it may be displayed. If no operation is performed during the “operation validity period”, the display may not be performed. Further, the sound output device 15 may output a premiere sound (a sound that is output only when the big hit is determined) together with the display of the predetermined premium character image. With this configuration, it is possible to further motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the "operation effective period".

(Eighth specific example related to state transition)
Next, an eighth specific example related to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 (A) shows an effect mode corresponding to a fluctuation pattern performed in the low-probability game state, and FIG. 114 (B) shows an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern performed in the high-probability game state. I have. FIG. 114 (A) shows one mode of the effect performed in the low-probability gaming state described in FIGS. 107 to 110 and the like, and FIG. 114 (B) is not mentioned in FIGS. 107 to 110 and the like. One aspect of the effect performed in the high-probability gaming state is shown.

  That is, in FIG. 114 (A), as an effect mode corresponding to the change pattern in the low-probability gaming state, the reach is formed through “change” after the effect symbol “starts changing,” and then “super reach” It shows that it has developed. In this “super reach”, the symbol indicating the loss is temporarily stopped (“767”), and thereafter, the first decorative member 17A is operated to indicate that the “special reach” has been developed. Then, in the “special reach”, it is shown that the character performs an effect of confronting each other, operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, and then derives the big hit symbol.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 114 (B), as an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the high-probability gaming state, the “super reach” in the low-probability gaming state is not performed. Is configured. That is, between FIG. 114 (A) and FIG. 114 (B), only a part differs in whether or not to perform an intermediate “super reach” (including an advanced effect), and the other effect contents are the same. In the high-probability gaming state, a so-called right-handed game is performed, and it is desired that the time from the start of the symbol change to the derivation of the result of the jackpot is shorter than in the low-probability gaming state. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 114 (B), the intermediate “super reach” is omitted, and after reaching, the game is directly developed into “special reach”, thereby shortening the digestion of the game in the high-probability gaming state. be able to.

(Other changes)
In the examples of FIGS. 101 to 114 described above, the operation means has been described in relation to the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, but the operation means can be changed as follows.

  For example, the effect button 18A is always in a operable position, but the effect lever 19A may be configured to be operable when the effect lever 19A is moved to the operable position. Specifically, the effect lever 19A is stored in the gaming machine frame at the initial position, and has a high probability, for example, when a jackpot is determined (while a loss is determined, By moving the effect lever 19A from the initial position to the operable position in a determined effect such as special reach with a low probability, the player can operate the effect lever 19A. Note that the effect lever 19A may be moved from the initial position to the operable position when the jackpot is determined, and the effect lever 19A may be vibrated when the operation by the player is detected. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect lever 19A or together with the vibration of the effect lever 19A, a sound for notifying the big hit may be output. In other words, when the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A can be easily moved to the operable position (change from the first mode to the second mode) as compared with the case where the losing is determined, and When the jackpot is determined and the effect lever 19A at the operable position is operated by the player, the effect lever 19A easily vibrates (changes easily from the second mode to the third mode). It can be said. The third mode may be, for example, a mode in which the light emitting unit provided on the effect lever 19A emits light, or a mode in which the decoration unit is driven to change. Note that these controls are assumed to be performed by the lamp CPU 104a. The effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be provided on the same member, respectively, or may be provided on separate and independent members.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may equip only one of the production button 18A or the production lever 19A. For example, when only the effect button 18A is provided, the effect button 18A can be switched between the first mode and the second mode. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the probability is high (while the loss is determined). In the case of a special effect such as a special reach, the effect button 18A is switched from the first mode to the second mode, so that the operation when the effect button 18A is in the first mode, The operation can be performed by the operation in the second mode. The effect button 18A may be vibrated when the big hit is determined. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A or together with the vibration of the effect button 18A, a sound for notifying the big hit may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A is more likely to change to the second mode than when the losing is determined, and when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A changes to the second mode. When a certain production button 18A is operated by the player, it can be said that the production button 18A is likely to vibrate (change from the second mode to the third mode). Note that, for example, the mode may be changed to a third mode different from the operation mode, the light-emitting mode, or the visual mode performed in the second mode. Specifically, the vibration mode of the effect button 18A changes stepwise according to the game state from the first mode to the second mode, the third mode, the fourth mode, and so on. It may be one that can change its shape, light emission, rotation, driving method and the like in a stepwise manner according to the game state. In this way, by changing the effect stepwise according to the game state, the interest of the player can be improved. Note that these controls are assumed to be performed by the lamp CPU 104a.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and is in a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state different from the first state. (Protruding (or vibrating, red, etc.)) that can be changed to an operating means (effect button (or operating lever, etc.)), and that the operating means is operated during an operation enabled state in which the operation of the operating means is enabled And an effect control means (sub-CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the effect control, wherein the effect control means is in an operation-enabled state for providing an operation promotion notification for prompting a player to perform an operation on the operation means. In the first operation valid state, the operation means is in the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed, the operation means is in the first state, Not to be in the second state

  As described above, the gaming machine Y changes the state of the operation unit between the first operation enabled state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation prompting operation and the second operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It offers a variety of different productions.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player with respect to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an operation valid state for validating an operation, The control means controls the first operation means or the second operation means in a first operation effective state which is an operation effective state in which a player is prompted to perform an operation promoting operation to the first operation means or the second operation means. An operation is performed on the first operation means in a second operation effective state, which is an operation effective state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed based on the operation and the operation promotion notification is not performed. Based on the operation Run the effect, be operated for the second operating means is not to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y performs a predetermined effect in the first operation valid state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to the operation means and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promoting notification is not performed. It offers a variety of effects with different operating means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is operable by the player, and is in a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (projection) different from the first state. (Or vibration, red, etc.) and effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on operation of the operation means during an operation valid state in which the operation of the operation means is valid. (Sub CPU), wherein the effect control means is in an operation effective state for performing operation promotion notification for prompting the player to perform an operation on the operation means during execution of the game effect relating to the game. In the operation valid state, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state during the standby state in which no game effect is executed, the operation means is set to the first state. , The second state is restricted.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the state of the operation means is different from the second operation valid state in the middle.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player with respect to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control unit (sub-CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation of the first operation unit or the second operation unit during an operation valid state of validating an operation, In the first operation enabled state, which is an operation enabled state for performing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to perform an operation on the first operation means or the second operation means, during the execution of the game effect related to the game, Based on the operation performed on the first operation means or the second operation means, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and the second operation in the standby state where the game effect is not executed is the operation valid state. In the operation valid state, the first operation means Based on that the operation against executes a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation, be operated for the second operating means, limits to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the operation means used to execute a predetermined effect differs depending on the second operation valid state in the middle.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. Is executed, a special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, and a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.) which can be operated by the player) Based on the operation result (producing button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to a second state (projection (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, and the judgment result by the judgment means, An effect control means (sub-CPU) for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notification, wherein the effect control means determines a predetermined value based on an operation of an operation means in the variable effect. Executable The predetermined effect includes a first effect executed by operating the operation means in the first state, a second effect executed by operating the operation means in the second state, and the operation in the first state or the second state. And a third effect performed by an operation on the means, and in the third effect in the variable effect performed based on the determination that the determination means performs the special game, the operation means is set to the first state. The second state is set at a higher rate than that.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the state of the operation means used when executing the third effect at a rate corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. .

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. Special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game by being determined to be executed, first operation means operable by a player, and second operation means different from the first operation means An effect control means (sub CPU) for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means. A predetermined effect can be executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and the predetermined effect includes a first effect executed based on an operation on the first operation means; 2 operating hands And a third effect performed by an operation on the first operating means or the second operating means, based on the determination made by the determining means to execute the special game. In the third effect in the variable effect to be executed, the second operation means is selected at a higher ratio than the first operation means.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by making the selection ratio of the operation means used in executing the third effect different according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. Is executed, a special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, a first operation means operable by a player, and a second operation means different from the first operation means And an effect control means (sub CPU) for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means, and the first operation is performed in the operation promoting effect. As an operation on the means, an operation of a first operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is prompted, and as an operation on the second operation means, an operation of a third operation type or a third operation The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type different from the operation of the type and promoting the operation of the first operation type is different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type, and the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type. , The rate of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type.

  As described above, in the case where the gaming machine Y performs a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the operation promoting effect, the gaming machine Y operates the first operating means in the operation promoting effect. The operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different rates, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different rates as the operation on the second operation means. Provides various operation promotion effects.

  The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion effect that prompts only an operation of the first operation type as an operation on the first operation means and an operation of the fourth operation type as an operation on the second operation means.

  ◆ As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and determines the special game by the determining unit. When determined to be executed, a special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, and a specific game for setting, after the end of the special game, a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Based on the state setting means (main CPU), operation means (for example, effect button) operable by the player, and a result of the determination by the determining means, a variable effect is provided using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result. A game machine comprising an effect control means (sub CPU), wherein the effect control means operates the operation means during an operation effective state in which the operation on the operation means in the variable effect is effective. And performing a predetermined effect in the second period after the first period in the specific game state at a higher rate than in the first period in the specific game state after the end of the special game. Set the operation enabled state to.

  In this manner, the gaming machine Y can provide an entertaining effect in which the effect using the operating means increases as the specific game state after the end of the special game continues.

  This operation means can be changed between a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (projection (or vibration, red, etc.) different from the first state), and effect control. The means sets the operation valid state in which the operation means is set to the second state in the second period at a higher rate than in the first period.

  In this manner, the gaming machine Y can provide an entertaining effect in which the effect using the operating means in the second state increases as the specific game state after the end of the special game continues.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of a specific effect is determined using the specific effect determination tables of FIGS. In this determination, it is easier to determine that the specific effect is to be executed in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss, and it is easier to determine that the specific effect is to be executed as the reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation. Then, when the specific effect is to be executed, it is determined whether or not the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, whether or not the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output, and whether or not the image of the effect button 18A is output.

  The vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect determines whether the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or a low speed using the specific effect vibration speed determination tables of FIGS. It is easier to determine that the effect button 18A is vibrated at a higher speed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and it is easier to determine that the effect button 18A is vibrated at a higher speed as the reach expectation is higher. In addition, the presence or absence of the pseudo sound output of the vibration button 18A in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect sound output determination tables shown in FIGS. It is easy to determine that a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss, and the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is higher as the reach effect with a higher expectation of the big hit is higher. Is easier to determine. Further, whether or not the image of the effect button 18A is output in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect image output determination tables in FIGS. It is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss, and it is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output as the reach effect with a higher expectation of the big hit is output.

  As described above, when the specific effect is performed, one of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A, and FIG. As shown, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination. As a result, the jackpot expectation degree can be notified to the player in multiple stages, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the jackpot expectation degree is determined by using the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 18A, and the presence or absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A. Although it is suggested, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the size of the image of the effect button 18A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the volume of output sound, and the like may be used. Also, the sound output in the specific effect may not be a pseudo sound of the vibrating effect button 18A, but may be a sound effect unique to the specific effect, a specific dialogue, or the like. When a specific effect is performed, a plurality of types of sounds may be output, and the type of output sound may indicate the jackpot expectation degree.

  In addition, the specific effect may be performed by the vibration of the effect lever 19A instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, or by the lighting or blinking of the LED built in the effect button 18A instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A. It may be an effect that makes it appear that 18A is operating. Further, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 18A, and the jackpot expectation degree may be indicated by the presence or absence of the object and the speed of the operation. Alternatively, a specific effect may be performed by rotating the effect button 18A, and the jackpot expectation degree may be indicated by the presence or absence of rotation, the rotation speed, and the rotation direction. Further, a specific effect may be performed by projecting the effect button 18A.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state (when the effect mode is the effect mode A) which is the normal game state, as shown in FIGS. The rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 18A is performed is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state (when the effect mode is B to D) which is the specific game state, the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is performed as shown in FIGS. The rate at which the prompting operation is promoted is higher than the rate at which the prompting operation prompting operation of the effect button 18A, which is the first operating means, is performed. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A, and in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect lever 19A. . Thereby, the pleasure of selecting the operation means according to the game state is given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A are made different according to the gaming state. For example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, for example, the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed, and only the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. In the state and the time saving game state, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed. Alternatively, only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18A is used as the first operating means, and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operating means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operating means. The effect button 18A may be used as the operation means. Further, as the first operation means and the second operation means, a button for effect different from effect button 18A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, or the like may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A during the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, and the player uses the effect lever 19A in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state. More often. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect button 18A and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect lever 19A are different in, for example, the first half period and the second half period of the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. You may make it do. In the present embodiment, for example, when the mode is the effect mode B, the rate at which the operation promoting notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A as the first operating means is made to prompt the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operating means. When the operation mode is in the effect mode C, the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is made higher than the rate at which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. I do. Further, in the effect mode D, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is set higher than in the effect mode C. Thereby, the interest of the game in the high probability gaming state and the time reduction gaming state can be improved.

  In addition, a reach effect using only the effect button 18A and a reach effect using only the effect lever 19A can be executed. In the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect button 18A is reduced. In a high, high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, in the production, there is a production only for the production button 18A and a production only for the production lever 19A. In the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, the production frequency of the production button 18A-only production is high, In the time-saving game state, the appearance frequency of the effect for exclusive use of the effect lever 19A may be increased.

  In addition, in the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A, an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A multiple times, such as "hit the button repeatedly", can be executed. In this case, the operation promotion notification is " Once ". For example, even if there is one operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the production button 18A five times, if there is two operation promotion notifications that prompt the operation of the production lever 19A, the player uses the production button 18A. It can be said that the frequency of using the effect lever 19A is higher than the frequency of performing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are two operation means of the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may have different kinds of operation means. When there are three or more types of operation means, the frequency of use of each operation means (the appearance ratio of operation promotion notification for prompting operation of each operation means) may be made different depending on the game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state as the specific gaming state, but not limited to this. A gaming state such as a probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, or a high probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state may correspond to the specific gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is provided in the low-probability game state, which is the normal game state, and in the non-probability state, in the non-problem state, in which the specific game state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. The execution rate is higher in the time-saving gaming state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is lower than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming state. . Thereby, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect button 18A.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the low probability game state of the normal game state and the non-time saving game state of the high probability game state of the specific game state. The execution rate is higher in the time-saving gaming state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the rate of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming state. . This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect lever 19A.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the big hit game, the specific game which is advantageous to the player after the big hit game is completed, compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state). A state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of times of the jackpot determination (the number of executable special symbol displays) reaches 84 times. It has been described as "ST machine". However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or, for example, the 10,000-times high probability game state continues). A gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal big hit” in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a low-probability gaming state may be used.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period in which the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the jackpot game is changed from 1 to 99 times is referred to as the “first period”, and the jackpot game A period in which the number of times of the subsequent change of the special symbol is 100 or more may be set as the above-mentioned “second period”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during the fluctuation effect in the “second period” at a higher rate than the “first period”.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a jing-ball gaming machine and an arranged ball gaming machine.

<Other inventions and the like described in the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions and the like described in the above embodiment will be described.
Note that the other inventions and the like described below include those that can be independently formed as inventions, and also include those that can be formed in combination with other inventions and the like.

  (A) Operation means which can be operated by a player and which can be changed between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and an operation validating operation for validating the operation means An effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated during the state, wherein the effect control means is an operation for prompting a player to perform an operation on the operation means. In the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the promotion notification is performed, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and the second operation in the operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. A gaming machine, wherein in the valid state, the operation means is set to the first state, but not to the second state.

  (B) a first operating means operable by a player, a second operating means different from the first operating means, and an operation for enabling an operation on the first operating means or the second operating means. An effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during the active state, wherein the effect control means is provided to a player. In the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state for performing operation promotion notification for prompting operation to the first operation means or the second operation means, an operation is performed on the first operation means or the second operation means. The first operation means is operated in the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the operation promotion notification is not performed based on the operation. That the operation Run the predetermined effect Flip was the be the operation on the second operation means, gaming machine characterized in that it does not perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  (C) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player, and it is determined by the special game determining means to control the special game. A special game control means for controlling the special game, a first operation means operable by the player, and a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state And a game state control means for controlling the operation effect control means, wherein when the game state control means controls the game in the normal game state, an operation for prompting an operation of the first operation means is provided. The ratio of performing The operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means is higher than the ratio of performing the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, and the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the rate at which the operation is performed is higher than the rate at which an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is performed.

  (D) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform the control of the special game which is advantageous to the player, and that the special game determining means performs the control of the special game. A special game control means for controlling the special game, a first operation means operable by the player, and a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means for controlling the game state control means, the operation effect control means, when the game state control means is controlling the game in the specific game state, the game state control means the normal game state Win games at And than is, in the ratio to perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means is low, the gaming machine, characterized in that.

  (E) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game determining means determine that the control of the special game is to be performed. A special game control means for controlling the special game, a first operation means operable by the player, and a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means. An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Game state control means for controlling the game state control means, when the game state control means is controlling the game in the specific game state, the game state control means in the normal game state Control the game Than when you are, game machines proportion to operate effect urging operation of the second operating means is high, characterized in that.

<Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment are as follows. >

  ◆ (A) First operating means operable by the player, second operating means operable by the player and different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and different from the normal gaming state A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means. An effect that can execute a first variable effect when controlled to the normal game state, and can execute a second variable effect different from the first variable effect when controlled to the specific game state Control means, and the effect control means, when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state, than when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state, Prompt operation of the first operation means Easy to create production is performed, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability game state), the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A) is selected more than the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state). Because it is easy to be done, interest can be improved.

  (B) First operating means operable by the player, second operating means operable by the player and different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and different from the normal gaming state A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means. An effect that can execute a first variable effect when controlled to the normal game state, and can execute a second variable effect different from the first variable effect when controlled to the specific game state Control means, the effect control means, when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state, than when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state, Prompt operation of the first operation means It may be a high frequency of execution of work performance, characterized in that. As described above, in the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state), the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is more than in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability game state). Since the selection is facilitated, the interest can be improved, and the effect using the first operation means is a characteristic effect in the specific game state, so that the interest can be particularly enhanced.

  (C) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, a first operation means operable by the player, and a operable by the player A game state control means for controlling a game state including a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control unit capable of executing an operation effect prompting operation of the operation unit and an operation effect prompting operation of the second operation unit is provided, and the first operation unit is configured to switch the first operation unit from the first mode to the first operation unit. It is possible to change to a second mode different from the mode, wherein the effect control means, when controlled in the normal game state, than in the specific game state, (1) The frequency of execution of operation effects that prompt operation of the operation means is high It may, when executing the special game may be the first operating means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability game state), the effect relating to the first operation means (the effect button 18A) is more likely to occur than in the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state). When it is determined that the control of the game is performed (at the time of winning), the first operation means is easily changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the protruding state). The interest of the game can be improved.

  (D) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, a first operating means operable by the player, and a operable by the player A game state control means for controlling a game state including a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control unit capable of executing an operation effect prompting operation of the operation unit and an operation effect prompting operation of the second operation unit, and the second operation unit is configured to switch the first operation mode from the first mode to the first operation mode. It is possible to change to a second aspect different from the aspect, wherein the effect control means, when controlled in the specific game state, than when controlled in the normal game state, An operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means is executed. Ku, wherein when it is determined to perform the special game is the second operating means easily varied in the second embodiment from the first embodiment, wherein the. As described above, in the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state), an effect related to the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is more likely to occur than in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability game state). When it is determined that the control of the special game is to be performed (for example, at the time of winning), the second operation means is changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the vibration state). Since it is easy to play, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (E) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, a first operating means operable by the player, and a operable by the player A game state control means for controlling a game state including a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control unit capable of executing an operation effect prompting operation of the operation unit and an operation effect prompting operation of the second operation unit, and the second operation unit is configured to switch the first operation mode from the first mode to the first operation mode. It is possible to change to a second aspect different from the aspect, wherein the effect control means, when controlled to the specific game state, than the operation effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, An operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means is easily executed. , If the it is determined to perform the special game, the second operation means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. As described above, in the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state), the operation of the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed more than the effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A). If it is determined that the effect prompting the player is likely to be selected and the control of the special game is to be performed (for example, at the time of winning), the second operating means is changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the normal mode). For example, the state easily changes to a vibration state), so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (F) First operating means operable by the player, second operating means operable by the player and different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and different from the normal gaming state A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means. An effect that can execute a first variable effect when controlled to the normal game state, and can execute a second variable effect different from the first variable effect when controlled to the specific game state Control means, the effect control means, when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state, than when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state, Prompt operation of the second operation means When the execution effect of the production effect may be high and an operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation device is being performed, the operation of both the first operation device and the second operation device can be enabled. It is characterized by the following. As described above, even if the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means (for example, the production lever 19A) is not performed, the operation of the first operation means (for example, the production button 18A) in addition to the operation of the second operation means is not performed. Since it is effective, the player can play the game using the easy-to-operate operation means of the plurality of operation means, and can enhance the interest of the game.

  (G) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means (for example, main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operating means (operable by the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) which can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. An operation effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation unit, a fluctuation display unit (for example, the image display device 14) for performing a fluctuation display based on the result of the determination, Reach effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling the reach effect based on the result of the determination, wherein the operation effect control means performs the change display after the execution of the variable display. Before running the Chi effect, compared after execution of the reach demonstration, the first operating means is constructed easy to perform an operation effect to promote operation, characterized in that. As described above, before the execution of the reach effect, the ratio at which the effect button 18A is selected is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after the reach effect, the effect button 18A is selected rather than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided.

  (H) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means (operable by the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) which can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on a result of the determination; After the execution of the effect, the operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means may be easier to execute than before the execution of the specific effect. As described above, before the execution of the specific effect, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is made higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after the execution of the specific effect, the ratio is higher than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided.

  (Re) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means (operable by the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) which can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on a result of the determination; As an effect, it is possible to execute a first specific effect and a second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect. If the first specific effect is being executed, the second specific effect is executed. And When compared with, it may easily perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means, characterized in that. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect is higher than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided.

  (◇) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means (for example, main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operating means (operable by the player) For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) which can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on a result of the determination; As an effect, a first specific effect and a second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect can be executed, and when the second specific effect is being executed, the first specific effect is executed. And As compared to the case, there may easily perform the operation effect urging operation of the second operating means, characterized in that. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect is higher than when the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operating means is being operated when a plurality of operating means are provided.

  (1) First operation means (for example, effect button 18A) that can be operated by the player, and first operation detection means (for example, operation detection switch 18a) for detecting that the first operation means has been operated. A second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and is different from the first operation means, and a second operation detection means (for example, an operation lever that detects that the second operation means has been operated) An operation detection switch 19a), an operation effect for prompting operation of the first operation means, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means. A movable means (for example, a first decorative member 17A) movable from a position to a second position, and the movable means is moved based on the detection performed by the first operation detection means or the second operation detection means. First Movable control means (for example, a lamp CPU 104a) capable of controlling movement from a position to a second position, wherein the movable control means controls an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means, and the detection is performed. In the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled and the detection is performed, the control is easily controlled to move the movable means from the first position to the second position, It is characterized by the following. As described above, in the determined effect in which the jackpot determination result is derived by operating the operation means, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect of the effect lever 19A is compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. In the case of displaying the image prompting the operation and operating the effect lever 19A, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates, which operation unit displays the image prompting the operation in the fixed effect is determined. Can be noticed.

  ◆ (ヲ) First operating means (for example, effect button 18A) operable by the player, and second operating means (for example, effect lever 19A) operable by the player and different from the first operating means. And an effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect prompting operation of the first operation unit and an operation effect prompting operation of the second operation unit; and a second position from the first position. And a movable control means (for example, a lamp CPU 104a) capable of controlling the movement of the movable means from the first position to the second position. The movement control means is configured such that, when the operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means, the operation effect is controlled as compared with the case where the operation effect prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled. For control means Before control is carried out that, the controlled movable device tends to move to the second position from said first position, characterized in that. In this manner, in the determined effect in which the jackpot determination result is derived by operating the operating means, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and when the effect lever 19A is operated, the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. By displaying an image prompting the user to operate the effect button 18A, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates before the control by the effect control means is performed, it is possible to increase the ratio before the control by the effect control means is performed. When the movable body is operated, it can be expected that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent “determined effect”.

  The “first operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, a button, a lever, a touch panel, a handle, or the like can be applied.

  The “second operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, a button, a lever, a touch panel, a handle, or the like can be applied.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine used for the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the gaming machine may be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first starting opening 6a first starting opening detecting sensor 7 second starting opening 7a second starting opening detecting sensor 8 big winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decorative member (Movable member)
17B Second decorative member (movable member)
17C Third decorative member (movable member)
18A production button (first operation means)
19A production lever (second operation means)
70 second starting port control device 80 special winning port control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c sub RAM

Claims (1)

A special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied;
Game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state different from the normal game state;
First operation means operable by a player;
A second operating means operable by a player and different from the first operating means;
Effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for prompting operation of the second operation means;
Variable display control means for controlling variable display based on the result of the determination,
Movable means movable from a first position to a second position;
With
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a specific effect after the start of the fluctuation display based on the result of the determination,
The executable specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect,
During the execution of the second specific effect, it is easier to execute an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means than during the execution of the first specific effect,
The movable means,
When the operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means, compared to the case where the operation effect prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled, the operation operation is started after the start of the variable display. A gaming machine, wherein the game machine is easily moved from the first position to the second position before performing the effect .